Cambium Networks 50450M 5GHz Point to MultiPoint Multi User MIMO Access Point User Manual PART1

Cambium Networks Limited 5GHz Point to MultiPoint Multi User MIMO Access Point PART1

USER MANUAL PART1

Download: Cambium Networks 50450M 5GHz Point to MultiPoint Multi User MIMO Access Point User Manual PART1
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]Cambium Networks 50450M 5GHz Point to MultiPoint Multi User MIMO Access Point User Manual PART1
Document ID3683907
Application IDBCwMV+/w0xqGBzGsJwEIqw==
Document DescriptionUSER MANUAL PART1
Short Term ConfidentialNo
Permanent ConfidentialNo
SupercedeNo
Document TypeUser Manual
Display FormatAdobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize448.74kB (5609284 bits)
Date Submitted2017-12-19 00:00:00
Date Available2018-03-02 00:00:00
Creation Date2017-10-31 12:48:35
Producing SoftwareAcrobat Distiller 11.0 (Windows)
Document Lastmod2017-10-31 12:48:37
Document TitleMicrosoft Word - pmp-2020_000v002 PMP 450 R15.2 UG.docx
Document CreatorPScript5.dll Version 5.2.2
Document Author: hmw746

33F
Cambium
450 Platform
User Guide
System Release 15.2
pass
Accuracy
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Cambium Networks
assumes no liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the
information obtained herein. Cambium reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein to
improve reliability, function, or design, and reserves the right to revise this document and to make changes
from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Cambium
does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product, software, or circuit described
herein; neither does it convey license under its patent rights or the rights of others. It is possible that this
publication may contain references to, or information about Cambium products (machines and programs),
programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or information must not be
construed to mean that Cambium intends to announce such Cambium products, programming, or services in
your country.
Copyrights
This document, Cambium products, and 3rd Party software products described in this document may include
or describe copyrighted Cambium and other 3rd Party supplied computer programs stored in semiconductor
memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Cambium, its licensors,
and other 3rd Party supplied software certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material, including the exclusive
right to copy, reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material.
Accordingly, any copyrighted material of Cambium, its licensors, or the 3rd Party software supplied material
contained in the Cambium products described in this document may not be copied, reproduced, reverse
engineered, distributed, merged or modified in any manner without the express written permission of
Cambium. Furthermore, the purchase of Cambium products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by
implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of
Cambium or other 3rd Party supplied software, except for the normal non-exclusive, royalty free license to use
that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.
Restrictions
Software and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No
part of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval
system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior
written permission of Cambium.
License Agreements
The software described in this document is the property of Cambium and its licensors. It is furnished by
express license agreement only and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement.
High Risk Materials
Cambium and its supplier(s) specifically disclaim any express or implied warranty of fitness for any high risk
activities or uses of its products including, but not limited to, the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft
navigation or aircraft communication systems, air traffic control, life support, or weapons systems (“High Risk
Use”). Any “High Risk Use” is unauthorized, is made at your own risk and you shall be responsible for any and
all losses, damage or claims arising out of any High Risk Use.
© 2017 Cambium Networks Limited. All Rights Reserved.
pmp-2020 (October 2017)
Contents
Cambium 450 Platform User Guide ......................................................................................................... 1
Contents ........................................................................................................................................................ i
List of Figures .......................................................................................................................................... xiii
List of Tables .......................................................................................................................................... xviii
About This User Guide ............................................................................................................................... 1
Contacting Cambium Networks ....................................................................................................... 1
Purpose ............................................................................................................................................ 2
Product notation conventions in document ...................................................................................... 2
Cross references .............................................................................................................................. 3
Feedback ......................................................................................................................................... 3
Important regulatory information ............................................................................................................. 4
Application software ......................................................................................................................... 4
USA specific information .................................................................................................................. 4
Canada specific information ............................................................................................................. 5
Renseignements specifiques au Canada ........................................................................................ 6
EU Declaration of Conformity .......................................................................................................... 7
Specific expertise and training for professional installers ................................................................ 7
Ethernet networking skills ................................................................................................................ 7
Lightning protection .......................................................................................................................... 7
Training ............................................................................................................................................ 8
Problems and warranty ........................................................................................................................... 9
Reporting problems .......................................................................................................................... 9
Repair and service ........................................................................................................................... 9
Hardware warranty ........................................................................................................................... 9
Security advice ...................................................................................................................................... 10
Warnings, cautions, and notes.............................................................................................................. 11
Warnings ........................................................................................................................................ 11
Cautions ......................................................................................................................................... 11
Notes .............................................................................................................................................. 11
Caring for the environment ................................................................................................................... 12
In EU countries ............................................................................................................................... 12
In non-EU countries ....................................................................................................................... 12
Chapter 1: Product description .......................................................................................................... 1-1
Overview of the 450 Platform Family ................................................................................................... 1-2
Purpose ......................................................................................................................................... 1-2
PMP 450m Series ......................................................................................................................... 1-2
PMP/PTP 450i Series ................................................................................................................... 1-4
PMP 450b Series .......................................................................................................................... 1-7
PMP/PTP 450 Series .................................................................................................................... 1-9
Page i
Contents
Supported interoperability for 450m/450i/450b/450 Series......................................................... 1-12
Typical deployment ..................................................................................................................... 1-13
Product variants .......................................................................................................................... 1-15
Wireless operation ............................................................................................................................. 1-16
Time division duplexing ............................................................................................................... 1-16
Encryption ................................................................................................................................... 1-19
MIMO........................................................................................................................................... 1-19
MU-MIMO .................................................................................................................................... 1-19
System management ......................................................................................................................... 1-21
Management agent ..................................................................................................................... 1-21
Web server .................................................................................................................................. 1-21
Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS).............................................................. 1-23
Network Time Protocol (NTP) ..................................................................................................... 1-23
Wireless Manager (WM) ............................................................................................................. 1-24
cnMaestro™ ................................................................................................................................ 1-25
Radio recovery mode .................................................................................................................. 1-26
Chapter 2: System hardware............................................................................................................... 2-1
System Components ............................................................................................................................ 2-2
Point-to-Multipoint (PMP) .............................................................................................................. 2-2
Backhaul (PTP) ............................................................................................................................. 2-5
450 Platform Family interfaces ..................................................................................................... 2-7
ATEX/HAZLOC variants.............................................................................................................. 2-14
Diagnostic LEDs.......................................................................................................................... 2-15
Power supply options .................................................................................................................. 2-19
ODU mounting brackets & accessories ...................................................................................... 2-28
Lightning protection ..................................................................................................................... 2-28
ODU interfaces................................................................................................................................... 2-29
PMP 450m Series AP ................................................................................................................. 2-29
PMP/PTP 450i ............................................................................................................................. 2-30
PMP 450b ................................................................................................................................... 2-32
Cabling ............................................................................................................................................... 2-33
Ethernet standards and cable lengths ........................................................................................ 2-33
Outdoor copper Cat5e Ethernet cable ........................................................................................ 2-34
SFP module kits .......................................................................................................................... 2-35
Main Ethernet port....................................................................................................................... 2-37
Aux port ....................................................................................................................................... 2-37
Lightning protection unit (LPU) and grounding kit.............................................................................. 2-41
Cable grounding kit ..................................................................................................................... 2-42
Antennas and antenna cabling .......................................................................................................... 2-43
Antenna requirements ................................................................................................................. 2-43
Supported external AP antennas ................................................................................................ 2-43
Supported external BH/SM antenna ........................................................................................... 2-43
RF cable and connectors ............................................................................................................ 2-44
Antenna accessories ................................................................................................................... 2-44
Page ii
Contents
GPS synchronization ......................................................................................................................... 2-45
GPS synchronization description ................................................................................................ 2-45
Universal GPS (UGPS) .............................................................................................................. 2-45
CMM5 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-46
CMM5 Controller Module ............................................................................................................ 2-48
CMM5 Injector Module ................................................................................................................ 2-49
CMM5 Injector Compatibility Matrix ............................................................................................ 2-49
CMM5 Specifications .................................................................................................................. 2-50
CMM4 (Rack Mount) .................................................................................................................. 2-51
CMM4 (Cabinet with switch) ..................................................................................................... 2-54
CMM4 (Cabinet without switch) ................................................................................................ 2-54
CMM3/CMMmicro ....................................................................................................................... 2-55
Installing a GPS receiver ................................................................................................................... 2-57
GPS receiver location ................................................................................................................. 2-57
Mounting the GPS receiver ......................................................................................................... 2-58
Cabling the GPS Antenna ........................................................................................................... 2-59
Installing and connecting the GPS LPU ...................................................................................... 2-59
Ordering the components .................................................................................................................. 2-60
Chapter 3: System planning................................................................................................................ 3-1
Typical deployment .............................................................................................................................. 3-2
ODU with PoE interface to PSU .................................................................................................... 3-2
Site planning ........................................................................................................................................ 3-7
Site selection for PMP/PTP radios ................................................................................................ 3-7
Power supply site selection ........................................................................................................... 3-8
Maximum cable lengths ................................................................................................................ 3-8
Grounding and lightning protection ............................................................................................... 3-8
ODU and external antenna location ............................................................................................ 3-10
ODU ambient temperature limits ................................................................................................. 3-10
ODU wind loading ....................................................................................................................... 3-11
Hazardous locations.................................................................................................................... 3-15
Drop cable grounding points ....................................................................................................... 3-15
Lightning Protection Unit (LPU) location ..................................................................................... 3-16
Radio Frequency planning ................................................................................................................. 3-17
Regulatory limits .......................................................................................................................... 3-17
Conforming to the limits .............................................................................................................. 3-17
Available spectrum ...................................................................................................................... 3-17
Analyzing the RF Environment ................................................................................................... 3-18
Channel bandwidth ..................................................................................................................... 3-18
Anticipating Reflection of Radio Waves ...................................................................................... 3-18
Obstructions in the Fresnel Zone ................................................................................................ 3-19
Planning for co-location............................................................................................................... 3-19
Multiple OFDM Access Point Clusters ........................................................................................ 3-20
Considerations on back-to-back frequency reuse ...................................................................... 3-22
PMP 450m Series planning ........................................................................................................ 3-26
Page iii
Contents
Link planning ...................................................................................................................................... 3-28
Range and obstacles .................................................................................................................. 3-28
Path loss ..................................................................................................................................... 3-28
Calculating Link Loss .................................................................................................................. 3-29
Calculating Rx Signal Level ........................................................................................................ 3-29
Calculating Fade Margin ............................................................................................................. 3-30
Adaptive modulation.................................................................................................................... 3-30
Planning for connectorized units ........................................................................................................ 3-31
When to install connectorized units ............................................................................................ 3-31
Choosing external antennas ....................................................................................................... 3-31
Calculating RF cable length (5.8 GHz FCC only) ....................................................................... 3-31
Data network planning ....................................................................................................................... 3-33
Understanding addresses ........................................................................................................... 3-33
Dynamic or static addressing ...................................................................................................... 3-33
DNS Client .................................................................................................................................. 3-34
Network Address Translation (NAT) ........................................................................................... 3-34
Developing an IP addressing scheme ........................................................................................ 3-35
Address Resolution Protocol ....................................................................................................... 3-35
Allocating subnets ....................................................................................................................... 3-36
Selecting non-routable IP addresses .......................................................................................... 3-36
Translation bridging..................................................................................................................... 3-36
Engineering VLANs ..................................................................................................................... 3-37
Network management planning ......................................................................................................... 3-41
Planning for SNMP operation ..................................................................................................... 3-41
Enabling SNMP ........................................................................................................................... 3-41
Security planning ............................................................................................................................... 3-42
Isolating AP/BHM from the Internet ............................................................................................ 3-42
Encrypting radio transmissions ................................................................................................... 3-42
Planning for HTTPS operation .................................................................................................... 3-43
Planning for SNMPv3 operation.................................................................................................. 3-43
Managing module access by passwords .................................................................................... 3-44
Planning for RADIUS operation .................................................................................................. 3-45
Filtering protocols and ports ........................................................................................................ 3-45
Encrypting downlink broadcasts ................................................................................................. 3-49
Isolating SMs in PMP .................................................................................................................. 3-49
Filtering management through Ethernet ..................................................................................... 3-49
Allowing management from only specified IP addresses ........................................................... 3-50
Configuring management IP by DHCP ....................................................................................... 3-50
Controlling PPPoE PADI Downlink Forwarding .......................................................................... 3-51
Remote AP Deployment .................................................................................................................... 3-52
Remote AP (RAP) Performance ................................................................................................. 3-53
Example Use Case for RF Obstructions ..................................................................................... 3-53
Example Use Case for Passing Sync ......................................................................................... 3-54
Physical Connections Involving the Remote AP ......................................................................... 3-55
Page iv
Contents
Passing Sync signal .................................................................................................................... 3-57
Wiring to Extend Network Sync .................................................................................................. 3-60
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information .................................................................................... 4-1
Cambium Networks end user license agreement ................................................................................ 4-2
Definitions ..................................................................................................................................... 4-2
Acceptance of this agreement ...................................................................................................... 4-2
Grant of license ............................................................................................................................. 4-2
Conditions of use .......................................................................................................................... 4-3
Title and restrictions ...................................................................................................................... 4-4
Confidentiality ................................................................................................................................ 4-4
Right to use Cambium’s name ...................................................................................................... 4-5
Transfer ......................................................................................................................................... 4-5
Updates ......................................................................................................................................... 4-5
Maintenance.................................................................................................................................. 4-5
Disclaimer ..................................................................................................................................... 4-6
Limitation of liability ....................................................................................................................... 4-6
U.S. government ........................................................................................................................... 4-6
Term of license .............................................................................................................................. 4-7
Governing law ............................................................................................................................... 4-7
Assignment ................................................................................................................................... 4-7
Survival of provisions .................................................................................................................... 4-7
Entire agreement........................................................................................................................... 4-7
Third party software ...................................................................................................................... 4-7
Compliance with safety standards ..................................................................................................... 4-22
Electrical safety compliance ........................................................................................................ 4-22
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) compliance....................................................................... 4-22
Human exposure to radio frequency energy ............................................................................... 4-22
Hazardous location compliance .................................................................................................. 4-32
Compliance with radio regulations ..................................................................................................... 4-34
Type approvals............................................................................................................................ 4-35
Brazil specific information ........................................................................................................... 4-36
Australia Notification ................................................................................................................... 4-36
Regulatory Requirements for CEPT Member States (www.cept.org) ........................................ 4-36
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation .................................................................................................. 5-1
Safety ................................................................................................................................................... 5-2
Hazardous locations...................................................................................................................... 5-2
Power lines .................................................................................................................................... 5-2
Working at heights ........................................................................................................................ 5-2
Power supply ................................................................................................................................. 5-2
Grounding and protective earth .................................................................................................... 5-2
Powering down before servicing ................................................................................................... 5-3
Primary disconnect device ............................................................................................................ 5-3
External cables .............................................................................................................................. 5-3
RF exposure near the antenna ..................................................................................................... 5-3
Page v
Contents
Minimum separation distances ..................................................................................................... 5-3
Grounding and lightning protection requirements ......................................................................... 5-3
Grounding cable installation methods ........................................................................................... 5-3
Siting ODUs and antennas ........................................................................................................... 5-4
Thermal Safety .............................................................................................................................. 5-4
Preparing for installation ...................................................................................................................... 5-5
ODU pre-configuration .................................................................................................................. 5-5
Preparing personnel ...................................................................................................................... 5-5
Preparing inventory ....................................................................................................................... 5-5
Preparing tools .............................................................................................................................. 5-6
Testing system components ................................................................................................................ 5-7
Unpacking Components ................................................................................................................ 5-7
Preparing the ODU........................................................................................................................ 5-7
Configuring Link for Test .................................................................................................................... 5-16
Configuring the management PC ................................................................................................ 5-16
Logging into the web interface – AP/SM/BH ............................................................................... 5-17
Using the Quick Start Configuration Wizard of the AP/BHM ...................................................... 5-17
Chapter 6: Installation ......................................................................................................................... 6-1
ODU variants and mounting bracket options ....................................................................................... 6-2
Mount the ODU, LPU and surge suppressor ....................................................................................... 6-3
Attach ground cables to the ODU ................................................................................................. 6-3
Mount the ODU on the mast ......................................................................................................... 6-6
Mount the top LPU ...................................................................................................................... 6-10
Mount the Surge Suppressor ...................................................................................................... 6-10
General protection installation .................................................................................................... 6-13
Installing the copper Cat5e Ethernet interface................................................................................... 6-19
Install the main drop cable .......................................................................................................... 6-19
Install the bottom LPU to PSU drop cable .................................................................................. 6-21
Installing external antennas to a connectorized ODU ....................................................................... 6-23
PMP 450i Series ......................................................................................................................... 6-23
PMP 450 Series .......................................................................................................................... 6-32
PMP 450i Series AP 900 MHz .................................................................................................... 6-41
PMP 450 Series SM 900 MHz .................................................................................................... 6-48
Installing an integrated ODU .............................................................................................................. 6-52
PMP 450m Series – AP .............................................................................................................. 6-52
PMP/PTP 450i Series – AP/SM/BH ............................................................................................ 6-55
Connecting Cat5e Ethernet cable ...................................................................................................... 6-56
Connecting an RJ45 and gland to a unit ..................................................................................... 6-56
Disconnecting an RJ45 and gland from a unit ............................................................................ 6-58
Installing ODU .................................................................................................................................... 6-59
Installing a 450 Platform Family AP ............................................................................................ 6-59
Installing a 450 Platform Family SM ........................................................................................... 6-60
Installing a 450 Platform Family BHM ......................................................................................... 6-61
Installing a 450 platform BHS ..................................................................................................... 6-62
Page vi
Contents
Configuring the Link .................................................................................................................... 6-62
Monitoring the Link ...................................................................................................................... 6-62
Installing the AC Power Injector ......................................................................................................... 6-63
Installing the AC Power Injector .................................................................................................. 6-63
Installing CMM4 ................................................................................................................................. 6-64
Supplemental installation information ................................................................................................ 6-65
Stripping drop cable .................................................................................................................... 6-65
Creating a drop cable grounding point ........................................................................................ 6-66
Attaching and weatherproofing an N type connector .................................................................. 6-69
Chapter 7: Configuration ..................................................................................................................... 7-1
Preparing for configuration................................................................................................................... 7-2
Safety precautions ........................................................................................................................ 7-2
Regulatory compliance.................................................................................................................. 7-2
Connecting to the unit .......................................................................................................................... 7-3
Configuring the management PC .................................................................................................. 7-3
Connecting to the PC and powering up ........................................................................................ 7-4
Using the web interface ....................................................................................................................... 7-5
Logging into the web interface ...................................................................................................... 7-5
Web GUI ....................................................................................................................................... 7-6
Using the menu options ................................................................................................................ 7-7
Quick link setup .................................................................................................................................. 7-11
Initiating Quick Start Wizard ........................................................................................................ 7-11
Configuring time settings............................................................................................................. 7-17
Powering the SM/BHS for test .................................................................................................... 7-18
Viewing the Session Status of the AP/BHM to determine test registration................................. 7-19
Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces .............................................................................................. 7-22
Configuring the IP interface ........................................................................................................ 7-23
Auxiliary port ............................................................................................................................... 7-26
NAT, DHCP Server, DHCP Client and DMZ ............................................................................... 7-27
DHCP – BHS ............................................................................................................................... 7-43
Reconnecting to the management PC ........................................................................................ 7-43
VLAN configuration for PMP............................................................................................................ 7-43
VLAN configuration for PTP ........................................................................................................... 7-53
PPPoE page of SM ..................................................................................................................... 7-57
IP4 and IPv6 ................................................................................................................................ 7-60
Upgrading the software version and using CNUT ............................................................................. 7-64
Checking the installed software version...................................................................................... 7-64
Upgrading to a new software version.......................................................................................... 7-64
General configuration......................................................................................................................... 7-68
PMP 450m and PMP/PTP 450i Series ....................................................................................... 7-68
PMP/PTP 450 Series .................................................................................................................. 7-86
Configuring Unit Settings page .......................................................................................................... 7-91
Setting up time and date .................................................................................................................... 7-95
Time page of 450 Platform Family - AP/BHM ............................................................................. 7-95
Page vii
Contents
Configuring synchronization............................................................................................................... 7-97
Configuring security ........................................................................................................................... 7-99
Managing module access by password .................................................................................... 7-100
Isolating from the internet – APs/BHMs .................................................................................... 7-103
Encrypting radio transmissions ................................................................................................. 7-103
Requiring SM Authentication .................................................................................................... 7-104
Filtering protocols and ports ...................................................................................................... 7-105
Encrypting downlink broadcasts ............................................................................................... 7-108
Isolating SMs ............................................................................................................................. 7-108
Filtering management through Ethernet ................................................................................... 7-109
Allowing management only from specified IP addresses ......................................................... 7-109
Restricting radio Telnet access over the RF interface .............................................................. 7-109
Configuring SNMP Access ........................................................................................................ 7-112
Configuring Security .................................................................................................................. 7-114
Configuring radio parameters .......................................................................................................... 7-126
PMP 450m Series – configuring radio ...................................................................................... 7-127
PMP/PTP 450i Series – configuring radio................................................................................. 7-131
PMP 450b Series - configuring radio ........................................................................................ 7-151
PMP/PTP 450 Series – configuring radio ................................................................................ 7-155
Custom Frequencies page ........................................................................................................ 7-172
DFS for 5 GHz Radios .............................................................................................................. 7-175
MIMO-A mode of operation ....................................................................................................... 7-177
Improved PPS performance of 450 Platform Family .................................................................... 7-179
Setting up SNMP agent ................................................................................................................... 7-180
Configuring SM/BHS’s IP over-the-air access .......................................................................... 7-181
Configuring SNMP .................................................................................................................... 7-183
Configuring syslog ........................................................................................................................... 7-188
Syslog event logging ................................................................................................................. 7-189
Configuring system logging ....................................................................................................... 7-189
Configuring remote access .............................................................................................................. 7-194
Accessing SM/BHS over-the-air by Web Proxy ........................................................................ 7-194
Monitoring the Link ........................................................................................................................... 7-195
Link monitoring procedure ........................................................................................................ 7-195
Exporting Session Status page of AP/BHM .............................................................................. 7-197
Configuring quality of service ........................................................................................................... 7-198
Maximum Information Rate (MIR) Parameters ......................................................................... 7-198
Token Bucket Algorithm ............................................................................................................ 7-198
MIR Data Entry Checking.......................................................................................................... 7-199
Committed Information Rate (CIR) ........................................................................................... 7-199
Bandwidth from the SM Perspective ......................................................................................... 7-200
Interaction of Burst Allocation and Sustained Data Rate Settings ............................................ 7-200
High-priority Bandwidth ............................................................................................................. 7-200
Traffic Scheduling ..................................................................................................................... 7-202
Setting the Configuration Source .............................................................................................. 7-203
Page viii
Contents
Configuring Quality of Service (QoS) ........................................................................................ 7-205
Installation Color Code ..................................................................................................................... 7-211
Zero Touch Configuration Using DHCP Option 66 .......................................................................... 7-212
Configuration Steps................................................................................................................... 7-212
Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................ 7-217
Configuring Radio via config file ...................................................................................................... 7-218
Import and Export of config file ................................................................................................. 7-218
Configuring cnMaestroTM Connectivity ............................................................................................. 7-220
Configuring a RADIUS server .......................................................................................................... 7-226
Understanding RADIUS for PMP 450 Platform Family ............................................................ 7-226
Choosing Authentication Mode and Configuring for Authentication Servers - AP ............... 7-227
SM Authentication Mode – Require RADIUS or Follow AP ................................................. 7-232
Handling Certificates ................................................................................................................. 7-237
Configuring RADIUS servers for SM authentication ................................................................. 7-238
Assigning SM management IP addressing via RADIUS........................................................... 7-240
Configuring RADIUS server for SM configuration ..................................................................... 7-240
Configuring RADIUS server for SM configuration using Zero Touch feature ........................... 7-244
Using RADIUS for centralized AP and SM user name and password management ............... 7-245
RADIUS Device Data Accounting ............................................................................................. 7-250
RADIUS Device Re-authentication ........................................................................................... 7-253
RADIUS Change of Authorization and Disconnect Message ................................................... 7-255
Microsoft RADIUS support ........................................................................................................ 7-256
Cisco ACS RADIUS Server Support ......................................................................................... 7-260
Configuring VSA........................................................................................................................ 7-263
Configuring Ping Watchdog ............................................................................................................. 7-267
Chapter 8: Tools ................................................................................................................................... 8-1
Using Spectrum Analyzer tool.............................................................................................................. 8-2
Mapping RF Neighbor Frequencies .............................................................................................. 8-2
Spectrum Analyzer tool ................................................................................................................. 8-3
Remote Spectrum Analyzer tool ................................................................................................. 8-11
Using the Alignment Tool ................................................................................................................... 8-14
Aiming page and Diagnostic LED – SM/BHS ............................................................................. 8-15
Alignment Tone ........................................................................................................................... 8-19
Using the Link Capacity Test tool ...................................................................................................... 8-21
Performing Link Test ................................................................................................................... 8-21
Performing Extrapolated Link Test.............................................................................................. 8-26
Link Capacity Test page of AP .................................................................................................... 8-28
Link Capacity Test page of BHM/BHS/SM.................................................................................. 8-29
Using AP Evaluation tool ................................................................................................................... 8-31
AP Evaluation page..................................................................................................................... 8-31
Using BHM Evaluation tool ................................................................................................................ 8-35
BHM Evaluation page of BHS ..................................................................................................... 8-35
Using the OFDM Frame Calculator tool ............................................................................................. 8-39
Using the Subscriber Configuration tool ............................................................................................ 8-43
Page ix
Contents
Using the Link Status tool .................................................................................................................. 8-44
Link Status – AP/BHM................................................................................................................. 8-44
Link Status – SM/BHS................................................................................................................. 8-47
Using BER Results tool...................................................................................................................... 8-49
Using the Sessions tool ..................................................................................................................... 8-50
Using the Ping Test tool ..................................................................................................................... 8-51
Chapter 9: Operation ........................................................................................................................... 9-1
System information .............................................................................................................................. 9-2
Viewing General Status................................................................................................................. 9-2
Viewing Session Status............................................................................................................... 9-20
Viewing Remote Subscribers ...................................................................................................... 9-29
Interpreting messages in the Event Log ..................................................................................... 9-29
Viewing the Network Interface .................................................................................................... 9-32
Viewing the Layer 2 Neighbors ................................................................................................... 9-32
System statistics ................................................................................................................................ 9-33
Viewing the Scheduler statistics ................................................................................................. 9-33
Viewing list of Registration Failures statistics ............................................................................. 9-35
Interpreting Bridging Table statistics ........................................................................................... 9-37
Interpreting Translation Table statistics ...................................................................................... 9-37
Interpreting Ethernet statistics .................................................................................................... 9-38
Interpreting RF Control Block statistics ....................................................................................... 9-41
Interpreting Sounding statistics for AP .......................................................................................... 9-1
Interpreting Sounding statistics for SM ......................................................................................... 9-1
Interpreting VLAN statistics ........................................................................................................... 9-2
Interpreting Data VC statistics ...................................................................................................... 9-4
Interpreting Throughput statistics .................................................................................................. 9-6
Interpreting Overload statistics ..................................................................................................... 9-9
Interpreting DHCP Relay statistics .............................................................................................. 9-10
Interpreting Filter statistics .......................................................................................................... 9-12
Viewing ARP statistics ................................................................................................................ 9-13
Viewing NAT statistics................................................................................................................. 9-13
Viewing NAT DHCP Statistics ..................................................................................................... 9-15
Interpreting Sync Status statistics ............................................................................................... 9-16
Interpreting PPPoE Statistics for Customer Activities................................................................. 9-17
Interpreting Bridge Control Block statistics ................................................................................. 9-19
Interpreting Pass Through Statistics ........................................................................................... 9-22
Interpreting SNMPv3 Statistics ................................................................................................... 9-23
Interpreting syslog statistics ........................................................................................................ 9-25
Interpreting Frame Utilization statistics ....................................................................................... 9-25
Radio Recovery ................................................................................................................................. 9-36
Radio Recovery Console– PMP/PTP 450i/450b and PMP 450m .............................................. 9-36
Default Mode (or Default/Override Plug) - PMP/PTP 450 Series ............................................... 9-39
Chapter 10:
Reference information ................................................................................................. 10-1
Equipment specifications ................................................................................................................... 10-2
Page x
Contents
Specifications for PMP 450m Series - AP................................................................................... 10-2
Specifications for PMP 450i Series - AP ..................................................................................... 10-6
Specifications for PMP 450i Series - SM .................................................................................. 10-12
Specifications for PTP 450i Series - BH ................................................................................... 10-17
Specifications for PMP 450b Series - SM ................................................................................. 10-21
Specifications for PMP 450 Series - AP.................................................................................... 10-26
Specifications for PMP 450 Series - SM ................................................................................... 10-31
Specifications for PTP 450 Series - BH .................................................................................... 10-36
PSU specifications .................................................................................................................... 10-41
Data network specifications ............................................................................................................. 10-43
Ethernet interface ...................................................................................................................... 10-43
Wireless specifications ..................................................................................................................... 10-44
General wireless specifications................................................................................................. 10-44
Link Range and Throughput ..................................................................................................... 10-45
Country specific radio regulations .................................................................................................... 10-46
Type approvals .......................................................................................................................... 10-46
DFS for 2.4 and 5 GHz Radios ................................................................................................. 10-47
Equipment Disposal ......................................................................................................................... 10-49
Waste (Disposal) of Electronic and Electric Equipment............................................................ 10-49
Country specific maximum transmit power ............................................................................... 10-49
Country specific frequency range ............................................................................................. 10-69
FCC specific information ........................................................................................................... 10-88
Innovation Science and Economic Development Canada (ISEDC) specific information ......... 10-96
Chapter 11:
Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................... 11-1
General troubleshooting procedure ................................................................................................... 11-2
General planning for troubleshooting .......................................................................................... 11-2
General fault isolation process .................................................................................................... 11-3
Secondary Steps ......................................................................................................................... 11-3
Troubleshooting procedures .............................................................................................................. 11-5
Module has lost or does not establish connectivity..................................................................... 11-5
NAT/DHCP-configured SM has lost or does not establish connectivity ..................................... 11-7
SM Does Not Register to an AP ................................................................................................. 11-8
Module has lost or does not gain sync........................................................................................ 11-9
Module does not establish Ethernet connectivity ...................................................................... 11-10
CMM4 does not pass proper GPS sync to connected modules ............................................... 11-11
Module Software Cannot be Upgraded..................................................................................... 11-12
Module Functions Properly, Except Web Interface Became Inaccessible ............................... 11-12
Power-up troubleshooting ................................................................................................................ 11-13
Registration and connectivity troubleshooting ................................................................................. 11-14
SM/BMS Registration ................................................................................................................ 11-14
Logs ................................................................................................................................................. 11-15
Persistent Logging .................................................................................................................... 11-15
Appendix A - 450m Reference information ............................................................................................... I
Specifications .................................................................................................................................... I
Page xi
Contents
450m overload ................................................................................................................................... I
Glossary ...................................................................................................................................................... III
Page xii
List of Figures
List of Figures
Figure 1 PMP/PTP 450 Platform Family typical bridge deployment ........................................................ 1-13
Figure 2 TDD frame division .................................................................................................................... 1-16
Figure 3 PMP 450b Series - SM interfaces................................................................................................ 2-9
Figure 4 PMP/PTP 450 Series - AP interfaces ........................................................................................ 2-10
Figure 5 PMP/PTP 450 Series – SM/BH interfaces ................................................................................. 2-11
Figure 6 PMP/PTP 450 Series – SM/BH Connectorized interfaces ........................................................ 2-12
Figure 7 PMP 450d Series - SM Integrated Dish ..................................................................................... 2-13
Figure 8 PMP 450 Series – SM 3 GHz Integrated ................................................................................... 2-13
Figure 9 PTP 450 Series – BHM/BHS ..................................................................................................... 2-13
Figure 10 AP/BHM diagnostic LEDs, viewed from unit front ................................................................... 2-15
Figure 11 AP/BH diagnostic LEDs, viewed from unit front ...................................................................... 2-17
Figure 12 AC Power Injector interfaces ................................................................................................... 2-21
Figure 13 AC+DC Enhanced Power Injector interfaces........................................................................... 2-22
Figure 14 -48 V DC Power Injector interfaces ......................................................................................... 2-24
Figure 15 -20 to 32 VDC Power Injector interfaces ................................................................................. 2-25
Figure 16 Gigabit Enet Capable power supply ........................................................................................ 2-27
Figure 17 PMP 450m Series - AP rear interfaces .................................................................................... 2-29
Figure 18 PMP/PTP 450i Series - ODU rear interfaces ........................................................................... 2-30
Figure 19 PMP/PTP 450i Series – Connectorized ODU antenna interfaces ........................................... 2-31
Figure 20 PMP 450b Series - ODU rear interfaces ................................................................................. 2-32
Figure 21 Outdoor drop cable .................................................................................................................. 2-34
Figure 22 Optical SFP transceiver module ............................................................................................. 2-36
Figure 23 Long cable gland..................................................................................................................... 2-36
Figure 24 Alignment Tone Cable ............................................................................................................. 2-38
Figure 25 RJ12 Alignment Tone Cable .................................................................................................... 2-38
Figure 26 Cable gland (part number #N000065L033) ............................................................................. 2-39
Figure 27 Cable grounding kit .................................................................................................................. 2-42
Figure 28 UGPS ....................................................................................................................................... 2-45
Figure 29 Cluster Management: Scenario 1 ............................................................................................ 2-47
Figure 30 Cluster Management: Scenario 2 ............................................................................................ 2-48
Figure 31 Controller Module..................................................................................................................... 2-48
Figure 32 Injector Module ........................................................................................................................ 2-49
Figure 33 CMM4 (Rack Mount) ................................................................................................................ 2-51
Figure 34 CMM4 56 V power adapter (dongle)........................................................................................ 2-52
Figure 35 CMM4 power adapter cabling diagram .................................................................................... 2-52
Figure 36 CMM4 (Cabinet with switch) .................................................................................................... 2-54
Figure 37 CMM3 ...................................................................................................................................... 2-56
Figure 38 Pole mounted CMM3 ............................................................................................................... 2-56
Figure 39 GPS antenna mounting ........................................................................................................... 2-58
Figure 40 Mast or tower installation ........................................................................................................... 3-2
Page xiii
List of Figures
Figure 41 Wall installation .......................................................................................................................... 3-3
Figure 42 Roof installation ......................................................................................................................... 3-4
Figure 43 GPS receiver wall installation .................................................................................................... 3-5
Figure 44 GPS receiver tower or mast installation .................................................................................... 3-6
Figure 45 Rolling sphere method to determine the lightning protection zones.......................................... 3-9
Figure 46 Example layout of 16 Access Point sectors (ABCD), 90 degree sectors ................................ 3-20
Figure 47 Example layout of 6 Access Point sectors (ABC), 60 degree sectors ..................................... 3-21
Figure 48 Reflection ................................................................................................................................. 3-23
Figure 49 Sector Antenna ........................................................................................................................ 3-24
Figure 50 cnMedusa Antenna .................................................................................................................. 3-25
Figure 51 PMP 450m Series AP antenna beam ...................................................................................... 3-26
Figure 52 Determinants in Rx signal level ............................................................................................... 3-29
Figure 53 Cambium networks management domain ............................................................................... 3-34
Figure 54 Example of IP address in Class B subnet ............................................................................... 3-36
Figure 55 Categorical protocol filtering .................................................................................................... 3-47
Figure 56 Remote AP deployment ........................................................................................................... 3-52
Figure 57 Example for 900-MHz remote AP behind 5 GHz SM .............................................................. 3-54
Figure 58 Remote AP wired to SM that also serves a customer ............................................................. 3-55
Figure 59 Remote AP wired to SM that serves as a relay ....................................................................... 3-56
Figure 60 Additional link to extend network sync, Design 3 .................................................................... 3-57
Figure 61 Additional link to extend network sync, Design 4 .................................................................... 3-58
Figure 62 Additional link to extend network sync, Design 5 .................................................................... 3-59
Figure 63 Co-located AP or BH timing master Sync Setting configuration.............................................. 3-60
Figure 64 Pin 1 location ........................................................................................................................... 5-10
Figure 65 Straight-through Ethernet Cable .............................................................................................. 5-12
Figure 66 AP/BHM to UGPS cable .......................................................................................................... 5-14
Figure 67 Alignment tone cable pin configuration .................................................................................... 5-15
Figure 68 RJ-12 pinout for the default plug.............................................................................................. 5-15
Figure 69 PMP 450 900 MHz SM grounding ............................................................................................. 6-6
Figure 70 Gigabit Etherner Surge Suppressor ........................................................................................ 6-11
Figure 71 600SSH Surge Suppressor – inside ....................................................................................... 6-12
Figure 72 Grounding cable minimum bend radius and angle .................................................................. 6-14
Figure 73 Grounding and lightning protection on wall ............................................................................. 6-15
Figure 74 Grounding and lightning protection on mast or tower .............................................................. 6-17
Figure 75 Grounding and lightning protection on building ....................................................................... 6-18
Figure 76 RJ45 cable ............................................................................................................................... 6-20
Figure 77 AP antenna parts ..................................................................................................................... 6-26
Figure 78 Antenna top plate ..................................................................................................................... 6-27
Figure 79 Attaching antenna plate to the AP ........................................................................................... 6-27
Figure 80 Attaching the plate ................................................................................................................... 6-28
Figure 81 Connect the port A and B to the PMP 450i AP ........................................................................ 6-28
Figure 82 AP antenna upper bracket assembly ....................................................................................... 6-29
Figure 83 AP antenna upper bracket attached to upper adjustment arms .............................................. 6-29
Figure 84 Rear strap connected to upper AP antenna bracket ............................................................... 6-30
Page xiv
List of Figures
Figure 85 Assembled upper bracket connected to AP antenna .............................................................. 6-30
Figure 86 AP Antenna Lower Bracket Assembly ..................................................................................... 6-30
Figure 87 Lower bracket attached to AP antenna ................................................................................... 6-31
Figure 88 Completed AP and antenna assembly .................................................................................... 6-31
Figure 89 PMP 450 AP antenna parts ..................................................................................................... 6-32
Figure 90 AP antenna upper bracket assembly ...................................................................................... 6-33
Figure 91 AP antenna upper bracket attached to upper adjustment arms ............................................. 6-33
Figure 92 Rear strap connected to upper AP antenna bracket .............................................................. 6-34
Figure 93 Assembled upper bracket connected to AP antenna ............................................................. 6-34
Figure 94 AP Antenna Lower Bracket Assembly .................................................................................... 6-35
Figure 95 Lower bracket attached to AP antenna .................................................................................. 6-35
Figure 96 Attaching bracket to the rear of the AP ................................................................................... 6-36
Figure 97 Lower bracket attached to AP antenna .................................................................................. 6-36
Figure 98 Mounted PMP 450 AP and antenna assembly, viewed from back and back ......................... 6-37
Figure 99 Attaching the AP antenna upper bracket to the pole ............................................................... 6-38
Figure 100 Attaching the AP antenna lower bracket to the pole.............................................................. 6-38
Figure 101 Variables for calculating angle of elevation (and depression) ............................................... 6-40
Figure 102 PMP 450i AP 900 MHz antenna unbox view ........................................................................ 6-41
Figure 103 PMP 450i AP 900 MHz antenna inventory ........................................................................... 6-41
Figure 104 Attaching radio mounting PMP 450i AP 900 MHz antenna to the pole ................................ 6-46
Figure 105 900 MHz sector antenna alignment ...................................................................................... 6-47
Figure 106 PMP 450i SM 900 MHz external directional antenna ............................................................ 6-48
Figure 107 Attach the antenna to the pole .............................................................................................. 6-48
Figure 108 Fixing the nuts....................................................................................................................... 6-49
Figure 109 Fixing the radio to the antenna .............................................................................................. 6-50
Figure 110 Connecting RF cable to the radio .......................................................................................... 6-50
Figure 111 Yagi antenna alignment - horizontally ................................................................................... 6-51
Figure 112 Yagi antenna alignment - upward tilt .................................................................................... 6-51
Figure 113 Yagi antenna alignment - downward tilt ................................................................................ 6-51
Figure 114 PMP 450m Series - AP unbox view ...................................................................................... 6-52
Figure 115 Fixing the mounting plate to the back of the ODU ................................................................. 6-55
Figure 116 Attaching the bracket body .................................................................................................... 6-55
Figure 117 Ethernet cable gland for PMP/PTP 450 Series .................................................................... 6-57
Figure 118 Ethernet cable gland for PMP/PTP 450i Series.................................................................... 6-57
Figure 119 Disarm Installation page (top and bottom of page shown) .................................................... 7-11
Figure 120 Regional Settings tab of AP/BHM .......................................................................................... 7-12
Figure 121 Radio Carrier Frequency tab of AP/BHM .............................................................................. 7-13
Figure 122 Synchronization tab of AP/BHM ............................................................................................ 7-14
Figure 123 LAN IP Address tab of the AP/BHM ...................................................................................... 7-15
Figure 124 Review and Save Configuration tab of the AP/BHM ............................................................. 7-16
Figure 125 Time tab of the AP/BHM ........................................................................................................ 7-17
Figure 126 Time and date entry formats .................................................................................................. 7-18
Figure 127 Session Status tab of AP ....................................................................................................... 7-20
Figure 128 NAT disabled implementation ................................................................................................ 7-28
Page xv
List of Figures
Figure 129 NAT with DHCP client and DHCP server implementation ..................................................... 7-29
Figure 130 NAT with DHCP client implementation .................................................................................. 7-29
Figure 131 NAT with DHCP server implementation ................................................................................ 7-30
Figure 132 NAT without DHCP implementation....................................................................................... 7-30
Figure 133 General page attributes - PMP 450 AP ................................................................................. 7-87
Figure 134 General page attributes - PMP 450 SM ................................................................................. 7-88
Figure 135 General page attributes - PTP 450 BHM ............................................................................... 7-89
Figure 136 General page attributes - PTP 450 BHS ............................................................................... 7-90
Figure 137 Sync Setting configuration ..................................................................................................... 7-97
Figure 138 AP Evaluation Configuration parameter of Security tab for PMP ........................................ 7-102
Figure 139 BHM Evaluation Configuration parameter of Security tab for PTP...................................... 7-102
Figure 140 RF Telnet Access Restrictions (orange) and Flow through (green) .................................... 7-109
Figure 141 RF Telnet Access Restriction (orange) and Potential Security Hole (green) ...................... 7-110
Figure 142 PMP 450i AP Radio attributes - 3 GHz ................................................................................ 7-131
Figure 143 PMP 450i SM Radio attributes - 3 GHz ............................................................................... 7-137
Figure 144 Multicast VC statistics .......................................................................................................... 7-171
Figure 145 Multicast scheduler statistics ............................................................................................... 7-171
Figure 146 AP DFS Status .................................................................................................................... 7-175
Figure 147 AP Session Status page ...................................................................................................... 7-194
Figure 148 AP Remote Subscribers page ............................................................................................. 7-194
Figure 149 Session Status page ............................................................................................................ 7-195
Figure 150 Exporting Session Status page of PMP 450m AP ............................................................... 7-197
Figure 151 Uplink and downlink rate caps adjusted to apply aggregate cap ........................................ 7-199
Figure 152 Uplink and downlink rate cap adjustment example ............................................................. 7-199
Figure 153 Installation Color Code of AP............................................................................................... 7-211
Figure 154 Configuration File upload and download page .................................................................... 7-218
Figure 155 Software Upgrade from cnMaestro™ .................................................................................. 7-221
Figure 156 DNS Test for cnMaestro™ connectivity ............................................................................... 7-222
Figure 157 Device Agent Logs ............................................................................................................... 7-223
Figure 158 Example cnMaestro™ screenshot ....................................................................................... 7-224
Figure 159 SM Certificate Management ................................................................................................ 7-238
Figure 160 User Authentication and Access Tracking tab of the SM .................................................... 7-249
Figure 161 RADIUS accounting messages configuration...................................................................... 7-253
Figure 162 Device re-authentication configuration ................................................................................ 7-253
Figure 163 RADIUS CoA configuration for AP....................................................................................... 7-255
Figure 164 EAPPEAP settings ............................................................................................................... 7-256
Figure 165 Importing certificate in NPS ................................................................................................. 7-257
Figure 166 Selecting MD5 from NPS console ....................................................................................... 7-258
Figure 167 User configuration ................................................................................................................ 7-258
Figure 168 RADIUS VSA configuration ................................................................................................. 7-259
Figure 169 Adding RADIUS client .......................................................................................................... 7-260
Figure 170 Creating users...................................................................................................................... 7-260
Figure 171 Creating RADIUS instance .................................................................................................. 7-261
Figure 172 RADIUS protocols ................................................................................................................ 7-261
Page xvi
List of Figures
Figure 173 Service selection .................................................................................................................. 7-262
Figure 174 Adding Trusted CA .............................................................................................................. 7-262
Figure 175 Installing Server Certificate .................................................................................................. 7-262
Figure 176 Monitoring logs..................................................................................................................... 7-263
Figure 177 VSA list ................................................................................................................................ 7-264
Figure 178 Spectrum analysis - Results .................................................................................................... 8-3
Figure 179 Spectrum Analyzer page result – PMP 450 SM .................................................................... 8-10
Figure 180 Alignment Tool tab of SM – Receive Power Level > -70 dBm............................................... 8-14
Figure 181 Alignment Tool tab of SM – Receive Power Level between -70 to -80 dBm ......................... 8-14
Figure 182 Alignment Tool tab of SM – Receive Power Level < -80 dBm............................................... 8-14
Figure 183 PMP/PTP 450i Series link alignment tone ............................................................................. 8-19
Figure 184 Link Capacity Test – PMP 450m Series AP .......................................................................... 8-22
Figure 185 Link Test with Multiple VCs (1518-byte packet length).......................................................... 8-24
Figure 186 Link Capacity Test – PMP 450/450i Series AP ..................................................................... 8-24
Figure 187 Link Test without Bridging (1714-byte packet length)............................................................ 8-25
Figure 188 Extrapolated Link Test results ............................................................................................... 8-27
Figure 189 SM Configuration page of AP ................................................................................................ 8-43
Figure 190 BER Results tab of the SM .................................................................................................... 8-49
Figure 191 Sessions tab of the AP .......................................................................................................... 8-50
Figure 192 Ping Test tab of the AP .......................................................................................................... 8-51
Figure 193 Remote Subscribers page of AP ........................................................................................... 9-29
Figure 194 Event log data ........................................................................................................................ 9-30
Figure 195 Network Interface tab of the AP ............................................................................................. 9-32
Figure 196 Network Interface tab of the SM ............................................................................................ 9-32
Figure 197 Layer 2 Neighbors page ........................................................................................................ 9-32
Figure 198 Bridging Table page ............................................................................................................... 9-37
Figure 199 Translation Table page of SM................................................................................................ 9-38
Figure 200 ARP page of the SM .............................................................................................................. 9-13
Figure 201 Recovery Options page ......................................................................................................... 9-38
Figure 202 SM Logs ............................................................................................................................... 11-15
Figure 203 SM Session log .................................................................................................................... 11-15
Figure 204 SM Authentication log .......................................................................................................... 11-15
Figure 205 SM Authorization log ............................................................................................................ 11-16
Page xvii
List of Tables
List of Tables
Table 1 Main characteristics of the PMP 450m Series AP ........................................................................ 1-3
Table 2 PMP 450m Series hardware configurations ................................................................................. 1-3
Table 3 Main characteristics of the PMP/PTP 450i Series ........................................................................ 1-4
Table 4 PMP/PTP 450i Series hardware configurations ............................................................................ 1-5
Table 5 Main characteristics of the PMP 450b Series ............................................................................... 1-7
Table 6 PMP 450b Series hardware configurations .................................................................................. 1-8
Table 7 Main characteristics of the PMP/PTP 450 Series ....................................................................... 1-10
Table 8 PMP/PTP 450 Series hardware configurations .......................................................................... 1-11
Table 9 Supported Interoperability for PMP ............................................................................................ 1-12
Table 10 Supported Interoperability for PTP........................................................................................... 1-12
Table 11 Modulation levels ...................................................................................................................... 1-18
Table 12 PMP 450m Series variants ......................................................................................................... 2-2
Table 13 PMP 450i Series variants............................................................................................................ 2-3
Table 14 PMP 450b Series variants .......................................................................................................... 2-3
Table 15 PMP 450 Series variants ............................................................................................................ 2-4
Table 16 PTP 450i Series variants ............................................................................................................ 2-5
Table 17 PTP 450 Series variants ............................................................................................................. 2-6
Table 18 PMP 450m Series AP interface descriptions and cabling .......................................................... 2-7
Table 19 PMP/PTP 450i Series - AP/SM/BH interface descriptions and cabling ...................................... 2-9
Table 20 PMP 450b Series - SM interface descriptions and cabling ....................................................... 2-10
Table 21 PMP/PTP 450 Series - AP interface descriptions and cabling – 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz .............. 2-11
Table 22 AP/BHM LED descriptions ........................................................................................................ 2-16
Table 23 SM/BHS LED descriptions ........................................................................................................ 2-18
Table 24 PSU part numbers for PMP 450m AP....................................................................................... 2-19
Table 25 PSU part numbers for PMP/PTP 450i Series ........................................................................... 2-20
Table 26 AC Power Injector interface functions ....................................................................................... 2-21
Table 27 AC+DC Enhanced Power Injector interface functions .............................................................. 2-23
Table 28 -48V DC Power Injector interfaces............................................................................................ 2-24
Table 29 -Power Injector interfaces ......................................................................................................... 2-25
Table 30 PSU part numbers for PMP 450b SM ....................................................................................... 2-25
Table 31 PSU part numbers for PMP/PTP 450 Series ............................................................................ 2-26
Table 32 –Gigabit Enet Capable power supply........................................................................................ 2-26
Table 33 Accessories part numbers ........................................................................................................ 2-28
Table 34 Lightning protection part numbers ............................................................................................ 2-28
Table 35 PMP 450m Series – AP rear interfaces .................................................................................... 2-29
Table 36 PMP/PTP 450i Series – ODU rear interfaces ........................................................................... 2-30
Table 37 PMP 450b Series – ODU rear interfaces .................................................................................. 2-32
Table 38 PSU drop cable length restrictions............................................................................................ 2-33
Table 39 Drop cable part numbers .......................................................................................................... 2-34
Table 40 SFP module kit part numbers .................................................................................................. 2-35
Page xviii
List of Tables
Table 41 Single Mode Optical SFP Interface per ODU (part number C000065L008) ............................ 2-35
Table 42 Multi-mode Optical SFP Interface per ODU (part number C000065L009) .............................. 2-35
Table 43 Main port PoE cable pinout ....................................................................................................... 2-37
Table 44 Aux port PoE cable pinout ........................................................................................................ 2-37
Table 45 Aux port PoE cable pinout ........................................................................................................ 2-38
Table 46 RJ12 Aux port PoE cable pinout ............................................................................................... 2-39
Table 47 Alignment tone adapter third party product details ................................................................... 2-39
Table 48 RJ45 connector and spare gland part numbers........................................................................ 2-39
Table 49 LPU and grounding kit contents ................................................................................................ 2-41
Table 50 LPU and grounding kit part number .......................................................................................... 2-42
Table 51 Cable grounding kit part numbers ............................................................................................. 2-42
Table 52 List of AP external antennas ..................................................................................................... 2-43
Table 53 PTP 450i Series BH or PMP 450/450i Series SM external antenna ........................................ 2-43
Table 54 RF cable and connector part numbers...................................................................................... 2-44
Table 55 CMM5 Cluster Management Scenario 1 ................................................................................... 2-46
Table 56 CMM5 Cluster Management Scenario 2 ................................................................................... 2-47
Table 57 Injector Compatibility Matrix ...................................................................................................... 2-49
Table 58 CMM5 Specifications ................................................................................................................ 2-50
Table 59 CMM4 power adapter cable pinout ........................................................................................... 2-53
Table 60 PMP 450m Series ODU part numbers ...................................................................................... 2-60
Table 61 PMP 450i Series ODU part numbers ........................................................................................ 2-60
Table 62 PMP 450i ATEX/HAZLOC ODU models/part numbers ............................................................ 2-61
Table 63 PTP 450i Series ODU part numbers ......................................................................................... 2-62
Table 64 PTP 450i ATEX/HAZLOC ODU models/part numbers ............................................................ 2-63
Table 65 PMP 450b Series ODU part numbers ....................................................................................... 2-63
Table 66 PMP 450 Series ODU part numbers ......................................................................................... 2-64
Table 67 PTP 450 Series ODU part numbers.......................................................................................... 2-66
Table 68 PMP/PTP 450/450I Series Accessories ................................................................................... 2-66
Table 69 PMP 450m Series wind loading (Newton) ................................................................................ 3-12
Table 70 PMP/PTP 450i Series wind loading (Newton) .......................................................................... 3-12
Table 71 PMP 450m Series wind loading (lb force) ................................................................................. 3-12
Table 72 PMP/PTP 450i Series wind loading (lb force) ........................................................................... 3-13
Table 73 PMP/PTP 450 Series wind loading (Newton) ........................................................................... 3-13
Table 74 PMP/PTP 450 Series wind loading (lb force) ............................................................................ 3-14
Table 75 EIRP limits from ATEX and HAZLOC standards ..................................................................... 3-15
Table 76 Example 5.8 GHz 4-channel assignment by access site .......................................................... 3-20
Table 77 Example 5.8 GHz 3-channel assignment by access site .......................................................... 3-21
Table 78 RF cable lengths required to achieve 1.2 dB loss at 5.8 GHz .................................................. 3-31
Table 79 Special case VLAN IDs ............................................................................................................. 3-38
Table 80 VLAN filters in point-to-multipoint modules ............................................................................... 3-39
Table 81 Q-in-Q Ethernet frame .............................................................................................................. 3-40
Table 82 HTTPS security material ........................................................................................................... 3-43
Table 83 Ports filtered per protocol selections ......................................................................................... 3-48
Table 84 Device default port numbers ..................................................................................................... 3-48
Page xix
List of Tables
Table 85 Safety compliance specifications .............................................................................................. 4-22
Table 86 EMC emissions compliance ...................................................................................................... 4-22
Table 87 FCC minimum safe distances – PMP 450m 5.1 GHz, 5.2 GHz, 5.4 GHz and 5.8 GHz ........... 4-25
Table 88 FCC minimum safe distances – PMP/PTP 450i 900 MHz, 3.65 GHz, 4.9 GHz, 5.1 GHz, 5.2
GHz, 5.4 GHz and 5.8 GHz ............................................................................................................... 4-26
Table 89 ISEDC minimum safe distances – PMP/PTP 450i, 900 MHz, 3.5 GHz, 3.65 GHz, 4.9 GHz, 5.2
GHz, 5.4 GHz, and 5.8 GHz .............................................................................................................. 4-27
Table 90 FCC minimum safe distances – PMP/PTP 450 900 MHz, 2.4 GHz, 3.65 GHz and 5 GHz...... 4-29
Table 91 ISEDC minimum safe distances – PMP/PTP 450 900 MHz, 2.4 GHz, 3.5/3.65 GHz and 5 GHz 430
Table 92 Radio certifications .................................................................................................................... 4-35
Table 93 Tools for PMP and PTP 450 Platform ODU installation.............................................................. 5-8
Table 94 Main port pinout ........................................................................................................................ 5-11
Table 95 Aux port pinout .......................................................................................................................... 5-11
Table 96 RJ-45 pinout for straight-through Ethernet cable ...................................................................... 5-12
Table 97 RJ-45 pinout for crossover Ethernet cable ............................................................................... 5-13
Table 98 AP/BHM to UGPS cable pinout................................................................................................. 5-14
Table 99 PMP/PTP 450i Series - ODU mounting bracket part numbers ................................................... 6-2
Table 100 RJ45 connector and cable color code .................................................................................... 6-20
Table 101 Menu options and web pages ................................................................................................... 7-7
Table 102 Session Status Attributes – AP ............................................................................................... 7-21
Table 103 IP interface attributes .............................................................................................................. 7-24
Table 104 SM/BHS private IP and LUID .................................................................................................. 7-25
Table 105 Aux port attributes ................................................................................................................... 7-26
Table 106 IP attributes - SM with NAT disabled ...................................................................................... 7-32
Table 107 IP attributes - SM with NAT enabled ....................................................................................... 7-34
Table 108 NAT attributes - SM with NAT disabled .................................................................................. 7-35
Table 109 NAT attributes - SM with NAT enabled ................................................................................... 7-37
Table 110 SM DNS Options with NAT Enabled ....................................................................................... 7-42
Table 111 NAT Port Mapping attributes - SM .......................................................................................... 7-42
Table 112 VLAN Remarking Example ..................................................................................................... 7-44
Table 113 AP/BHM VLAN tab attributes .................................................................................................. 7-46
Table 114 Q-in-Q Ethernet frame ............................................................................................................ 7-47
Table 115 SM VLAN attributes ................................................................................................................ 7-49
Table 116 SM VLAN Membership attributes............................................................................................ 7-53
Table 117 BHM VLAN page attributs ....................................................................................................... 7-53
Table 118 BHS VLAN page attributes ..................................................................................................... 7-56
Table 119 SM PPPoE attributes .............................................................................................................. 7-58
Table 120 DiffServ attributes – AP/BHM.................................................................................................. 7-60
Table 121 Packet Filter Configuration attributes ...................................................................................... 7-62
Table 122 General page attributes – PMP 450i AP ................................................................................. 7-68
Table 123 General page attributes –PMP 450m AP ................................................................................ 7-73
Table 124 General page attributes – PMP 450i SM ................................................................................ 7-75
Table 125 General page attributes – PTP 450i BHM .............................................................................. 7-78
Table 126 General page attributes – PTP 450i BHS ............................................................................... 7-80
Page xx
List of Tables
Table 127 General page attributes – PMP 450i SM ................................................................................ 7-83
Table 128 Unit Settings attributes – 450 Platform Family AP/BHM ......................................................... 7-92
Table 129 SM Unit Settings attributes ..................................................................................................... 7-94
Table 130 450 Platform Family - AP/BHM Time attributes ..................................................................... 7-95
Table 131 Add User page of account page - AP/ SM/BH ...................................................................... 7-100
Table 132 Delete User page - 450 Platform Family - AP/ SM/BH ......................................................... 7-101
Table 133 Change User Setting page - 450 Platform Family AP/ SM/BH ............................................. 7-101
Table 134 User page –450 Platform Family AP/SM/BH ........................................................................ 7-102
Table 135 AP/BHM Protocol Filtering attributes .................................................................................... 7-105
Table 136 SM/BHS Protocol Filtering attributes .................................................................................... 7-107
Table 137 Port Configuration attributes – AP/SM/BHM/BMS ................................................................ 7-108
Table 138 Security attributes –450 Platform Family AP ........................................................................ 7-114
Table 139 Security attributes –450 Platform Family SM ........................................................................ 7-119
Table 140 Security attributes - 450 Platform Family BHS ..................................................................... 7-124
Table 141 PMP 450m AP Radio attributes - 5 GHz ............................................................................... 7-127
Table 142 PMP 450i AP Radio attributes - 5 GHz ................................................................................. 7-132
Table 143 PMP 450i SM Radio attributes – 5 GHz ............................................................................... 7-138
Table 144 PMP 450i AP Radio attributes - 900 MHz ............................................................................. 7-143
Table 145 PTP 450i BHM Radio page attributes – 5 GHz..................................................................... 7-145
Table 146 PTP 450i BHS Radio attributes – 5 GHz .............................................................................. 7-148
Table 147 PMP 450i SM Radio attributes – 5 GHz ............................................................................... 7-151
Table 148 PMP 450 AP Radio attributes - 5 GHz .................................................................................. 7-155
Table 149 PMP 450 AP Radio attributes - 3.65 GHz............................................................................. 7-157
Table 150 PMP 450 AP Radio attributes - 3.5 GHz ............................................................................... 7-158
Table 151 PMP 450 AP Radio attributes - 2.4 GHz ............................................................................... 7-159
Table 152 PMP 450 SM Radio attributes – 5 GHz ................................................................................ 7-160
Table 153 PMP 450 SM Radio attributes – 3.65 GHz ........................................................................... 7-162
Table 154 PMP 450 SM Radio attributes – 3.5 GHz ............................................................................. 7-163
Table 155 PMP 450 SM Radio attributes – 2.4 GHz ............................................................................. 7-164
Table 156 PMP 450 SM Radio attributes –900 MHz ............................................................................. 7-165
Table 157 PTP 450 BHM Radio attributes –5 GHz ............................................................................... 7-167
Table 158 PTP 450 BHM Radio attributes –5 GHz ............................................................................... 7-168
Table 159 Example for mix of multicast and unicast traffic scenarios ................................................... 7-170
Table 160 450 Platform Family AP/SM/BH Custom Frequencies page – 5 GHz .................................. 7-172
Table 161 PMP/PTP 450 SM/BH Custom Frequencies page – 3.65 GHz ............................................ 7-173
Table 162 PMP/PTP 450 SM/BH Custom Frequencies page – 3.5 GHz .............................................. 7-174
Table 163 Contention slots and number of SMs .................................................................................... 7-176
Table 164 450 Platform Family Modulation levels ................................................................................. 7-177
Table 165 Co-channel Interference per (CCI) MCS .............................................................................. 7-178
Table 166 Adjacent Channel Interference (ACI) per MCS ..................................................................... 7-178
Table 167 LAN1 Network Interface Configuration tab of IP page attributes .......................................... 7-181
Table 168 SNMP page attributes ........................................................................................................... 7-183
Table 169 Syslog parameters ................................................................................................................ 7-189
Table 170 Syslog Configuration attributes - AP ..................................................................................... 7-190
Page xxi
List of Tables
Table 171 Syslog Configuration attributes - SM .................................................................................... 7-191
Table 172 Syslog Configuration attributes - BHS .................................................................................. 7-192
Table 173 Characteristics of traffic scheduling ...................................................................................... 7-202
Table 174 Recommended combined settings for typical operations ..................................................... 7-203
Table 175 Where feature values are obtained for a SM with authentication required ........................... 7-203
Table 176 MIR, VLAN, HPC, and CIR Configuration Sources, Authentication Disabled ...................... 7-204
Table 177 QoS page attributes - AP ...................................................................................................... 7-205
Table 178 QoS page attributes - SM ..................................................................................................... 7-207
Table 179 QoS page attributes - BHM ................................................................................................... 7-209
Table 180 QoS page attributes - BHS ................................................................................................... 7-210
Table 181 Configuring cnMaestro .......................................................................................................... 7-220
Table 182 Security tab attributes ........................................................................................................... 7-228
Table 183 SM Security tab attributes ..................................................................................................... 7-232
Table 184 RADIUS Vendor Specific Attributes (VSAs) ......................................................................... 7-241
Table 185 AP User Authentication and Access Tracking attributes ...................................................... 7-247
Table 186 SM User Authentication and Access Tracking attributes ...................................................... 7-249
Table 187 Device data accounting RADIUS attributes .......................................................................... 7-250
Table 188 Ping Watchdog attributes ...................................................................................................... 7-267
Table 189 Spectrum Analyzer page attributes - AP ................................................................................... 8-4
Table 190 Spectrum Analyzer page attributes - SM .................................................................................. 8-6
Table 191 Spectrum Analyzer page attributes - BHM ............................................................................... 8-7
Table 192 Spectrum Analyzer page attributes - BHS ................................................................................ 8-8
Table 193 Remote Spectrum Analyzer attributes - AP ............................................................................ 8-12
Table 194 Remote Spectrum Analyzer attributes - BHM ......................................................................... 8-13
Table 195 Aiming page attributes – SM ................................................................................................... 8-16
Table 196 Aiming page attributes - BHS.................................................................................................. 8-18
Table 197 Alignment Tool Headsets and Alignment tone adapter third party product details................. 8-20
Table 198 Link Capacity Test page attributes – AP ................................................................................. 8-28
Table 199 Link Capacity Test page attributes – BHM/BHS ..................................................................... 8-30
Table 200 AP Evaluation tab attributes - AP............................................................................................ 8-31
Table 201 BHM Evaluation tab attributes - BHS ...................................................................................... 8-35
Table 202 OFDM Frame Calculator page attributes ................................................................................ 8-40
Table 203 OFDM Calculated Frame Results attributes ........................................................................... 8-41
Table 204 Color code versus uplink/downlink rate column...................................................................... 8-44
Table 205 Link Status page attributes – AP/BHM ................................................................................... 8-45
Table 206 Link Status page attributes – SM/BHS ................................................................................... 8-47
Table 207 General Status page attributes – PMP 450m AP ..................................................................... 9-3
Table 208 General Status page attributes – PMP 450/450i AP................................................................. 9-8
Table 209 General Status page attributes - SM....................................................................................... 9-11
Table 210 General Status page attributes - BHM .................................................................................... 9-15
Table 211 General Status page attributes - BHS .................................................................................... 9-18
Table 212 Device tab attributes ............................................................................................................... 9-20
Table 213 Session tab attributes ............................................................................................................. 9-21
Table 214 Power tab attributes ................................................................................................................ 9-23
Page xxii
List of Tables
Table 215 Configuration tab attributes ..................................................................................................... 9-25
Table 216 Session Status > Configuration CIR configuration denotations .............................................. 9-27
Table 217 Link Quality tab attributes ....................................................................................................... 9-28
Table 218 Event Log messages for abnormal events ............................................................................. 9-30
Table 219 Event Log messages for normal events ................................................................................. 9-31
Table 220 Scheduler tab attributes .......................................................................................................... 9-33
Table 221 SM Registration Failures page attributes - AP ........................................................................ 9-35
Table 222 BHS Registration Failures page attributes - BHM .................................................................. 9-36
Table 223 Flags status ............................................................................................................................. 9-36
Table 224 Ethernet tab attributes............................................................................................................. 9-38
Table 225 Radio (Statistics) page attributes – RF Control Block............................................................. 9-41
Table 226 Radio (Statistics - AP) page attributes - Sounding ................................................................... 9-1
Table 227 Radio (Statistics - SM) page attributes - Sounding ................................................................... 9-1
Table 228 VLAN page attributes ................................................................................................................ 9-2
Table 229 Data VC page attributes............................................................................................................ 9-4
Table 230 RF overload Configuration attributes – AP/BHM ...................................................................... 9-6
Table 231 Overload page attributes – AP/SM/BHM/BHS .......................................................................... 9-9
Table 232 DHCP Relay page attributes – AP/SM ................................................................................... 9-11
Table 233 Filter page attributes - SM ....................................................................................................... 9-12
Table 234 NAT page attributes - SM ....................................................................................................... 9-14
Table 235 NAT DHCP Statistics page attributes - SM ............................................................................. 9-15
Table 236 Sync Status page attributes - AP ............................................................................................ 9-16
Table 237 PPPoE Statistics page attributes - SM ................................................................................... 9-17
Table 238 Bridge Control Block page attributes – AP/SM/BHM/BHS ..................................................... 9-19
Table 239 Pass Through Statistics page attributes – AP ........................................................................ 9-22
Table 240 SNMPv3 Statistics page attributes – AP ................................................................................. 9-23
Table 241 Syslog statistics page attributes – AP/SM/BH ........................................................................ 9-25
Table 242 Frame utilization statistics for PMP 450m AP ......................................................................... 9-26
Table 243 Frame utilization statistics for 450/450i/450m......................................................................... 9-33
Table 244 Recovery Options attributes.................................................................................................... 9-38
Table 245 PMP 450m Series - AP specifications .................................................................................... 10-2
Table 246 PMP 450i Series - AP specifications....................................................................................... 10-6
Table 247 PMP 450i Series - SM specifications .................................................................................... 10-12
Table 248 PTP 450i Series - BH specifications ..................................................................................... 10-17
Table 249 PMP 450b Series - SM specifications ................................................................................... 10-21
Table 250 PMP 450 Series - AP specifications ..................................................................................... 10-26
Table 251 PMP 450 Series - SM specifications ..................................................................................... 10-31
Table 252 PTP 450 Series - BH specifications ...................................................................................... 10-36
Table 253 PMP/PTP 450i AC power Injector specifications .................................................................. 10-41
Table 254 PMP/PTP 450 power supply specifications (part number: N000900L001A) ........................ 10-42
Table 255 450m/450i Series Main and Aux Ethernet bridging specifications........................................ 10-43
Table 256 450 Series Ethernet bridging specifications.......................................................................... 10-43
Table 257 450 Platform Family - wireless specifications ....................................................................... 10-44
Table 258 Radio certifications ............................................................................................................... 10-46
Page xxiii
List of Tables
Table 259 Country & Bands DFS setting ............................................................................................... 10-47
Table 260 Default combined transmit power per country – 900 MHz band PMP 450i Series............... 10-49
Table 261 Default combined transmit power per country – 2.4 GHz band PMP/PTP 450 Series......... 10-50
Table 262 Default combined transmit power per country – 3.5 GHz band PMP/PTP 450 Series......... 10-51
Table 263 Default combined transmit power per country – 3.65 GHz band PMP/PTP 450 .................. 10-52
Table 264 Default combined transmit power per country – 4.9 GHz band PMP/PTP 450/450i/450b Series
......................................................................................................................................................... 10-52
Table 265 Default combined transmit power per Country – 5.1 GHz band PMP/PTP 450i/450b Series .. 1054
Table 266 Default combined transmit power per Country – 5.1 GHz band PMP 450m Series ............. 10-55
Table 267 Default combined transmit power per country – 5.2 GHz band ............................................ 10-57
Table 268 Default combined transmit power per Country – 5.2 GHz band PMP 450m Series ............. 10-59
Table 269 Default combined transmit power per country – 5.4 GHz band PMP 450m Series.............. 10-60
Table 270 Default combined transmit power per country – 5.4 GHz band PMP/PTP 450i Series ........ 10-61
Table 271 Default combined transmit power per country – 5.4 GHz band PMP 450 Series................. 10-64
Table 272 Default combined transmit power per Country – 5.8 GHz band PMP 450m Series ............. 10-65
Table 273 Default combined transmit power per country – 5.8 GHz band PMP/PTP 450i Series ........ 10-65
Table 274 Default combined transmit power per country – 5.8 GHz band PMP 450 Series................. 10-67
Table 275 Frequency range per country – 900 MHz band .................................................................... 10-69
Table 276 Frequency range per country – 2.4 GHz band PMP/PTP 450 Series .................................. 10-70
Table 277 Frequency range per country – 3.5 GHz band PMP/PTP 450 Series .................................. 10-70
Table 278 Frequency range per country – 3.65 GHz band PMP/PTP 450 Series ................................ 10-71
Table 279 Frequency range per country – 4.9 GHz band PMP/PTP 450i/450b Series ........................ 10-72
Table 280 Frequency range per country – 5.4 GHz band PMP/PTP 450i/450b Series ........................ 10-77
Table 281 Frequency range per country – 5.4 GHz band PMP/PTP 450
Series ............... 10-79
Table 282 Frequency range per country – 5.8 GHz band PMP/PTP 450i Series ................................. 10-83
Table 283 Frequency range per country – 5.8 GHz band PMP/PTP 450 Series .................................. 10-84
Table 284 US FCC IDs .......................................................................................................................... 10-88
Table 285 USA approved antenna list 4.9 GHz ..................................................................................... 10-94
Table 286 USA approved antenna list 5.1 and 5.2 GHz ........................................................................ 10-95
Table 287 USA approved antenna list 5.4 GHz ..................................................................................... 10-95
Table 288 USA approved antenna list 5.8 GHz ..................................................................................... 10-96
Table 289 ISEDC Certification Numbers .............................................................................................. 10-98
Table 290 Canada approved antenna list 4.9 and 5.8 GHz................................................................... 10-99
Table 291 Canada approved antenna list 5.2 and 5.4 GHz................................................................ 10-100
Page xxiv
About This User Guide
This guide describes the planning, installation, configuration and operation of the Cambium point-to-point
and point-to-multipoint wireless Ethernet bridges. It covers PMP/PTP 450, 450i, 450b, 450d and PMP
450m platform Series. It is intended for use by the system designer, system installer and system
administrator.
For radio network design, refer to the following chapters:

Chapter 1: Product description

Chapter 2: System hardware

Chapter 3: System planning

Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information

Chapter 5: Preparing for installation

Chapter 6: Installation
For system configuration, tools and troubleshooting, refer to the following chapters:

Chapter 7: Configuration

Chapter 8: Tools

Chapter 9: Operation

Chapter 10: Reference information

Chapter 11: Troubleshooting
Contacting Cambium Networks
Support website:
https://support.cambiumnetworks.com
Main website:
http://www.cambiumnetworks.com
Sales enquiries:
solutions@cambiumnetworks.com
Support enquiries:
https://support.cambiumnetworks.com
Repair enquiries:
https://support.cambiumnetworks.com
Telephone number list:
http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/contact
Address:
Cambium Networks Limited,
Global Headquarters, 3800 Golf Road,
Suite 360, Rolling Meadows,
IL 60008 USA
Page 1
Purpose
Cambium Networks Point-to-Multi-Point (PMP)/Point-To-Point (PTP) 450 documents are intended to
instruct and assist personnel in the operation, installation and maintenance of the Cambium PMP/PTP
equipment and ancillary devices of 450 Platform Family. It is recommended that all personnel engaged in
such activities be properly trained.
Cambium disclaims all liability whatsoever, implied or express, for any risk of damage, loss or reduction in
system performance arising directly or indirectly out of the failure of the customer, or anyone acting on the
customer's behalf, to abide by the instructions, system parameters, or recommendations made in this
document.
Product notation conventions in document
This document covers Cambium 450 Series, 450i Series and 450m Series products. The following
notation conventions are followed while referring to product series and product family:
Product notation
Description

450 Platform Family
Refers to the complete 450 Series family, which includes 450
Series, 450i Series and 450m Series

450 Series

450i Series
Refers to 450 Series devices in the following configurations:
- PMP 450
- AP [2.4GHz/3.5 GHz/3.65 GHz /5 GHz]
- Connectorized
- SM [900 MHz/2.4GHz/3.5 GHz/3.65 GHz /5 GHz]
- Connectorized/ Integrated
- PTP 450 BHM/ BHS [900 MHz/3.5 GHz/3.65 GHz/5 GHz]
- Connectorized/ Integrated
- PMP 450d SM [5 GHz]
Refers to 450i Series devices in the following configurations:
- PMP 450i
- AP [900 MHz/3 GHz/5 GHz]
- Connectorized/ Integrated
- SM [3 GHz/5 GHz]
- Connectorized/ Integrated
- PTP 450i BHM/ BHS [3 GHz/5 GHz]
- Connectorized/ Integrated

450b Series
Refers to 450b Series devices in the following configurations:
- PMP 450b
- SM [5 GHz]
- Integrated
Page 2

450m Series
Refers to 450m Series device configuration:
- PMP 450m AP 5 GHz
- Integrated
Cross references
References to external publications are shown in italics. Other cross references, emphasized in blue text
in electronic versions, are active links to the references.
This document is divided into numbered chapters that are divided into sections. Sections are not
numbered, but are individually named at the top of each page, and are listed in the table of contents.
Feedback
We appreciate feedback from the users of our documents. This includes feedback on the structure,
content, accuracy, or completeness of our documents. To provide feedback, visit our support
website.https://support.cambiumnetworks.com.
Page 3
Important regulatory information
The 450 Platform Family products are certified as an unlicensed device in frequency bands where it is not
allowed to cause interference to licensed services (called primary users of the bands).
Application software
Download the latest 450 Platform Family software and install it in the Outdoor Units (ODUs) before
deploying the equipment. Instructions for installing software are provided in Upgrading the software
version and using CNUT on page 7-64.
USA specific information
Caution
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference, and

This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation
The USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) requires manufacturers to implement special
features to prevent interference to weather radar systems that operate in the band 5600 MHz to 5650
MHz. These features must be implemented in all products able to operate outdoors in the band 5470 MHz
to 5725 MHz.
Manufacturers must ensure that such radio products cannot be configured to operate outside of FCC
rules; specifically it must not be possible to disable or modify the radar protection functions that have
been demonstrated to the FCC.
Cambium supplies variants of the 450i and 450m Series specifically for operation in the USA in order to
comply with FCC requirements (KDB 905462 D02 UNII DFS Compliance Procedures New Rules v01r02).
These variants are only allowed to operate with license keys that comply with FCC rules.
Similarly, Cambium supplies variants of the 450 Series specifically for operation in the USA in order to
comply with FCC requirements (KDB 443999 D01 Approval of DFS UNII Devices v01r04). These variants
are only allowed to operate with license keys that comply with FCC rules. To ensure compliance when
using PMP 450 Series and PTP 450 Series, follow the recommendation in Avoidance of weather radars
(USA only).
Page 4
External antennas
When using a connectorized version of the product, the conducted transmit power may need to be
reduced to ensure the regulatory limit on transmitter EIRP is not exceeded. The installer must have an
understanding of how to compute the effective antenna gain from the actual antenna gain and the feeder
cable losses.
The range of permissible values for maximum antenna gain and feeder cable losses are included in this
user guide together with a sample calculation. The product GUI automatically applies the correct
conducted power limit to ensure that it is not possible for the installation to exceed the EIRP limit, when
the appropriate values for antenna gain and feeder cable losses are entered into the GUI.
Avoidance of weather radars (USA only)
To comply with FCC rules (KDB 443999: Interim Plans to Approve UNII Devices Operating in the 5470 5725 MHz Band with Radar Detection and DFS Capabilities), units which are installed within 35 km (22
miles) of a Terminal Doppler Weather Radar (TDWR) system (or have a line of sight propagation path to
such a system) must be configured to avoid any frequency within +30 MHz or –30 MHz of the frequency
of the TDWR device. This requirement applies even if the master is outside the 35 km (22 miles) radius
but communicates with outdoor clients which may be within the 35 km (22 miles) radius of the TDWRs. If
interference is not eliminated, a distance limitation based on line-of-sight from TDWR will need to be
used. Devices with bandwidths greater than 20 MHz may require greater frequency separation.
When planning a link in the USA, visit http://spectrumbridge.com/udia/home.aspx, enter the location of
the planned link and search for TDWR radars. If a TDWR system is located within 35 km (22 miles) or has
line of sight propagation to the PTP device, perform the following tasks:

Register the installation on http://spectrumbridge.com/udia/home.aspx.

Make a list of channel center frequencies that must be barred, that is, those falling within +30 MHz or
–30 MHz of the frequency of the TDWR radars.
The 450 Platform Family AP must be configured to not operate on the affected channels.
Canada specific information
Caution
This device complies with ISEDC ’s license-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference; and
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
ISEDC requires manufacturers to implement special features to prevent interference to weather radar
systems that operate in the band 5600 MHz to 5650 MHz. These features must be implemented in all
products able to operate outdoors in the band 5470 MHz to 5725 MHz.
Page 5
Manufacturers must ensure that such radio products cannot be configured to operate outside of ISEDC
rules; specifically it must not be possible to disable or modify the radar protection functions that have
been demonstrated to ISEDC .
In order to comply with these ISEDC requirements, Cambium supplies variants of the 450 Platform
Family for operation in Canada. These variants are only allowed to operate with license keys that comply
with ISEDC rules. In particular, operation of radio channels overlapping the band 5600 MHz to 5650 MHz
is not allowed and these channels are permanently barred.
In addition, other channels may also need to be barred when operating close to weather radar
installations.
Other variants of the 450 Platform Family are available for use in the rest of the world, but these variants
are not supplied to Canada except under strict controls, when they are needed for export and deployment
outside Canada.
Renseignements specifiques au Canada
Attention
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils
radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
ISEDC a demandé aux fabricants de mettre en œuvre des mécanismes spécifiques pour éviter
d’interférer avec des systèmes radar fonctionnant dans la bande 5600 MHz à 5650 MHz. Ces
mécanismes doivent être mis en œuvre dans tous les produits capables de fonctionner à l'extérieur dans
la bande 5470 MHz à 5725 MHz.
Les fabricants doivent s'assurer que les produits de radiocommunications ne peuvent pas être configurés
pour fonctionner en dehors des règles ISEDC , en particulier, il ne doit pas être possible de désactiver ou
modifier les fonctions de protection des radars qui ont été démontrés à ISEDC .
Afin de se conformer à ces exigences de ISEDC , Cambium fournit des variantes du 450 Platform Family
exclusivement pour le Canada. Ces variantes ne permettent pas à l’équipement de fonctionner en dehors
des règles de ISEDC . En particulier, le fonctionnement des canaux de radio qui chevauchent la bande
5600-5650 MHz est interdite et ces canaux sont définitivement exclus.
ISEDC Approved Antennas
The list of antennas used to obtain ISEDC approvals is provided in section Country specific radio
regulations, Innovation Science and Economic Development Canada (ISEDC) , Table 306.
Page 6
Antennas externes
Lorsque vous utilisez une version du produit sans antenne intégrée, il peut être nécessaire de réduire la
puissance d'émission pour garantir que la limite réglementaire de puissance isotrope rayonnée
équivalente (PIRE) n'est pas dépassée. L'installateur doit avoir une bonne compréhension de la façon de
calculer le gain de l'antenne réelle et les pertes dans les câbles de connections.
La plage de valeurs admissibles pour un gain maximal de l'antenne et des pertes de câbles de
connections sont inclus dans ce guide d'utilisation avec un exemple de calcul. L'interface utilisateur du
produit applique automatiquement la limite de puissance menée correct afin de s'assurer qu'il ne soit pas
possible pour l'installation de dépasser la limite PIRE, lorsque les valeurs appropriées pour le gain
d'antenne et les pertes de câbles d'alimentation sont entrées dans l’interface utilisateur.
Antennes approuvées par ISEDC
La liste des antennas approveés pour l’operation au Canada est founie dans le chapitre Country specific
radio regulations, Innovation Science and Economic Development Canada (ISEDC) tableaux Table 306.
EU Declaration of Conformity
Hereby, Cambium Networks declares that the Cambium 450 Series, 450i Series and 450m Series
Wireless Ethernet Bridge complies with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of
Directive 1999/5/EC. The declaration of conformity may be consulted at:
http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/ec-doc
Specific expertise and training for professional
installers
To ensure that the 450 Platform Family products – PMP/PTP 450 Series, PMP/PTP 450i Series, PMP
450m Series are installed and configured in compliance with the requirements of ISEDC and the FCC,
installers must have the radio engineering skills and training described in this section.
The Cambium Networks technical training program details can be accessed from below link:
http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/training/category/technical-training/
Ethernet networking skills
The installer must have the ability to configure IP addressing on a PC and to set up and control products
using a web browser interface.
Lightning protection
To protect outdoor radio installations from the impact of lightning strikes, the installer must be familiar with
the normal procedures for site selection, bonding and grounding. Installation guidelines for the 450
Platform Family can be found in Chapter 2: System hardware and Chapter 3: System planning.
Page 7
Training
The installer needs to have basic competence in radio and IP network installation. The specific
requirements applicable to the 450 Platform should be gained by reading Chapter 5: Preparing for
installation, Chapter 6: Installation, Chapter 7: Configuration, Chapter 8: Tools and Chapter 9: Operation;
and by performing sample set ups at base workshop before live deployments.
The Cambium Networks technical training program details can be accessed from below link:
http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/training/category/technical-training/
Page 8
Problems and warranty
Reporting problems
If any problems are encountered when installing or operating this equipment, follow this procedure to
investigate and report:
Search this document and the software release notes of supported releases.
Visit the support website.
Ask for assistance from the Cambium product supplier.
Gather information from affected units, such as any available diagnostic downloads.
Escalate the problem by emailing or telephoning support.
Repair and service
If unit failure is suspected, obtain details of the Return Material Authorization (RMA) process from the
support website (http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support).
Hardware warranty
Cambium’s standard hardware warranty is for one (1) year from date of shipment from Cambium
Networks or a Cambium distributor. Cambium Networks warrants that hardware will conform to the
relevant published specifications and will be free from material defects in material and workmanship
under normal use and service. Cambium shall within this time, at its own option, either repair or replace
the defective product within thirty (30) days of receipt of the defective product. Repaired or replaced
product will be subject to the original warranty period but not less than thirty (30) days.
To register PMP and PTP products or activate warranties, visit the support website. For warranty
assistance, contact the reseller or distributor. The removal of the tamper-evident seal will void the
warranty.
Caution
Using non-Cambium parts for repair could damage the equipment or void warranty. Contact
Cambium for service and repair instructions.
Portions of Cambium equipment may be damaged from exposure to electrostatic discharge.
Use precautions to prevent damage.
Page 9
Security advice
Cambium Networks systems and equipment provide security parameters that can be configured by the
operator based on their particular operating environment. Cambium recommends setting and using these
parameters following industry recognized security practices. Security aspects to be considered are
protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of information and assets. Assets include the ability
to communicate, information about the nature of the communications, and information about the parties
involved.
In certain instances Cambium makes specific recommendations regarding security practices, however the
implementation of these recommendations and final responsibility for the security of the system lies with
the operator of the system.
Page 10
Warnings, cautions, and notes
The following describes how warnings and cautions are used in this document and in all documents of the
Cambium Networks document set.
Warnings
Warnings precede instructions that contain potentially hazardous situations. Warnings are used to alert
the reader to possible hazards that could cause loss of life or physical injury. A warning has the following
format:
Warning
Warning text and consequence for not following the instructions in the warning.
Cautions
Cautions precede instructions and are used when there is a possibility of damage to systems, software,
or individual items of equipment within a system. However, this damage presents no danger to personnel.
A caution has the following format:
Caution
Caution text and consequence for not following the instructions in the caution.
Notes
A note means that there is a possibility of an undesirable situation or provides additional information to
help the reader understand a topic or concept. A note has the following format:
Note
Note text.
Page 11
Caring for the environment
The following information describes national or regional requirements for the disposal of Cambium
Networks supplied equipment and for the approved disposal of surplus packaging.
In EU countries
The following information is provided to enable regulatory compliance with the European Union (EU)
directives identified and any amendments made to these directives when using Cambium equipment in
EU countries.
Disposal of Cambium equipment
European Union (EU) Directive 2002/96/EC Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)
Do not dispose of Cambium equipment in landfill sites. For disposal instructions, refer to
http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/weee-compliance
Disposal of surplus packaging
Do not dispose of surplus packaging in landfill sites. In the EU, it is the individual recipient’s responsibility
to ensure that packaging materials are collected and recycled according to the requirements of EU
environmental law.
In non-EU countries
In non-EU countries, dispose of Cambium equipment and all surplus packaging in accordance with
national and regional regulations.
Page 12
Chapter 1:
Product description
This chapter provides a high level description of 450 Platform Family products. It describes in general
terms the function of the product, the main product variants and the main hardware components. The
following topics are described in this chapter:

Overview of the 450 Platform Family on page 1-2 introduces the key features, typical uses, product
variants and components of the 450 Platform Family.

Wireless operation on page 1-16 describes how the 450 Platform Family wireless link is operated,
including modulation modes and spectrum management.

System management on page 1-21 introduces the 450 Platform Family management system,
including the web interface, configuration, security, alerts and recovery.
Page 1-1
Chapter 1: Product description
Overview of the 450 Platform Family
Overview of the 450 Platform Family
This section introduces the key features, typical uses, product variants and components of the 450
Platform Family.
Purpose
Cambium 450 Platform Family products are designed for Ethernet bridging over point-to-point and pointto-multipoint microwave links in unlicensed and lightly-licensed frequency bands 900MHz, 2.4 GHz,
3.5/3.65 GHz and 4.9 to 5.925 GHz.
Users must ensure that the 450 Platform Family complies with local operating regulations.
The 450 Platform Family acts as a transparent bridge between two or more segments of the operator’s
network. In this sense, it can be treated as a virtual wired connection among points. The 450 Series
platform forwards 802.3 Ethernet frames destined for the other part of the network and filters frames it
does not need to forward.
450 Platform Family
The 450 Series platform supports following:

PMP 450m Series

PMP/PTP 450i Series

PMP 450b Series

PMP/PTP 450 Series
PMP 450m Series
The PMP 450m Series AP is a revolutionary product which is based on Multi-User Multiple-Input and
Multiple-Output (MU-MIMO) technology. By combining a sophisticated beam forming antenna array with
multiple transceivers, Cambium Networks is using leading edge technology to provide a substantial shift
upward in capacity per sector.
Key features
The Cambium PMP 450m Series AP offers the following benefits:

MU-MIMO Access Point is a technologically cutting edge device providing more than 400 Mbps in 20
MHz Channel bandwidth depending upon SMs position within sector

PMP 450m AP is compatible with existing PMP 450/450i Series Subscriber Modules(SM), providing
an easy network upgrade path. This benefits to re-use existing SMs (i.e. capital investment).

3x higher throughput packet rate compare 450 Series

Integrated with 14x14 MU-MIMO antenna

Gigabit copper/power port combined, 1000BaseT port with power out and SFP port
Page 1-2
Chapter 1: Product description

Overview of the 450 Platform Family
More than 20 bps/Hz spectral efficiency and over 40 bps/Hz when deployed in frequency re-use
configuration
Table 1 gives a summary of the main PMP 450m Series AP characteristics.
Table 1 Main characteristics of the PMP 450m Series AP
Characteristic
Value
Topology
PMP
Wireless link condition
LOS, near LOS or non-LOS
Range
PMP: Up to 40 mi (or 64 km)
Duplexing
TDD (symmetric and asymmetric)
Connectivity
1000Base-T Ethernet Main port with PoE input
Operating frequencies
5.150 to 5.925 GHz
Tx Power
38 dBm EIRP
Channel bandwidth
5, 10, 15, 20, and 40 MHz
High spectral efficiency
More than 40 bps/Hz1
Timing synchronization
CMM5 or UGPS
Data rate
more than 400 Mbps (20 MHz channel BW)
Frequency bands
The PMP 450m Series AP operates from 5150 to 5925 MHz bands.
Hardware components
The ODU (Outdoor unit) is a self-contained transceiver unit that houses both radio and networking
electronics.
The PMP 450m Series is supplied in the following configurations:
Table 2 PMP 450m Series hardware configurations
ODU
Frequency
ODU type
PMP 450m AP
5150 to 5925 MHz
Integrated
This is achieved in an ABAB frequency reuse AP deployment model.
Page 1-3
14 dBi, 90° MU-MIMO sector
antenna
Chapter 1: Product description
Overview of the 450 Platform Family
PMP/PTP 450i Series
The PMP/PTP 450i Series is a high performance wireless bridge for Ethernet traffic. It is capable of
operating in line-of-sight (LOS), near-LOS and non-LOS propagation conditions. It supports 900 MHz, 3
GHz, and 4.9 to 5.925 GHz frequency band.
Key features
The PMP/PTP 450i Series has extensive quality of service (QoS) involving traffic classification, traffic
policy and shaping capability.
The Cambium PMP/PTP 450i Series offers the following benefits:

Cambium’s high performing point-to-multipoint solution, with up to 310 Mbps (40 MHz Channel
Bandwidth and 5 ms Frame Period) usable throughput for PMP and PTP

State-of-the-art MIMO (Multi In Multi Out) technology

Upto 7.5 bps/Hz spectral efficiency

Increased Packet Processing rate

Efficient GPS synchronized, scheduled TDD operation for easy AP/BHM site deployment and
performance that is consistent regardless of SM/BHS loading

A range of cost-effective subscriber device solutions to meet the business case of any network
application

MIMO B Mode: This technique provides for the ability to double the throughput of a radio transmission
under proper RF conditions. Different data streams are transmitted simultaneously on two different
antennas

MIMO-A mode: This mode of operation has same modulation levels as the MIMO-B mode, namely:
QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-QAM and 256-QAM. This mode increases system reliability in the links.

Timing synchronization via CMM4, CMM5, or UGPS
Table 3 gives a summary of the main PMP/PTP 450i Series characteristics.
Table 3 Main characteristics of the PMP/PTP 450i Series
Characteristic
Value
Topology
PMP/PTP
Wireless link
condition
LOS, near LOS or non-LOS
Range
PTP Up to 186 mi (or 299 km) depending on configuration for all bands
PMP: Up to 40 mi (or 64 km) for 5 GHz band
PMP: Up to 120 mi (or 193 km) for 900 MHz band
Duplexing
TDD (symmetric and asymmetric)
Connectivity
1000Base-T Ethernet Main port with PoE input
Operating
frequencies
902 to 928 MHz
3.3 to 3.9 GHz
Page 1-4
Chapter 1: Product description
Overview of the 450 Platform Family
4.9 to 5.925 GHz
Tx Power
Max 25 dBm (3 GHz)
max 27 dBm (5 GHz)
max 25 dBm (900 MHz)
Channel
bandwidth
5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, and 40 MHz
Note
All bands do not support all channel bandwidths. For more information, refer to
this link.
Spectral
efficiency
Up to 7.5 bps/Hz
Timing
synchronization
CMM4, CMM5, or UGPS
Data rate
Up to 310 Mbps (40 MHz channel BW) for PMP/PTP
Frequency bands
The PMP/PTP 450i Series ODU can operate in the following bands:

900 MHz band: 902 to 928 MHz

3 GHz band: 3300 to 3900 MHz

5 GHz band: 4900 to 5925 MHz
Note
900 MHz, 3 GHz, and 5 GHz bands with different frequencies require different hardware
components.
Hardware components
The ODU (Outdoor unit) is a self-contained transceiver unit that houses both radio and networking
electronics. The main hardware components of the PMP/PTP 450i Series are as follows:

PMP 450i AP

PMP 450i SM

PTP 450i BH (BHM/BHS)
The PMP/PTP 450i Series is supplied in the following configurations:
Table 4 PMP/PTP 450i Series hardware configurations
ODU
Frequency
ODU type
Page 1-5
Chapter 1: Product description
PMP 450i AP
PMP 450i SM
PTP 450i BH
Overview of the 450 Platform Family
902 to 928 MHz
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
3.3 to 3.9 GHz
Integrated
17 dBi, 90° sector dual slant antenna
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
4.9 to 5.925 GHz
Integrated
16 dBi, 90° sector antenna
(support 4.9, 5.1, 5.2, 5.4
and 5.8 GHz)
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
3.3 to 3.9 GHz
Integrated
19 dBi, SM/BH with MARS antenna
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
4.9 to 5.925 GHz
Integrated
23 dBi flat panel antenna
(support 4.9, 5.1, 5.2, 5.4
and 5.8 GHz)
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
3.3 to 3.9 GHz
Integrated
19 dBi, SM/BH with MARS antenna
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
4.9 to 5.925 GHz
Integrated
23 dBi flat panel antenna
(support 4.9, 5.1, 5.2, 5.4
and 5.8 GHz)
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
Note
The BH ODU can be configured as a BHM or a BHS in PTP mode.
Page 1-6
Chapter 1: Product description
Overview of the 450 Platform Family
PMP 450b Series
The PMP 450b Series is a high performance wireless Subscriber Module. It supports 4.9 to 5.925 GHz
frequency band.
Key features
The Cambium PMP 450b Series offers the following benefits:

Ultra-wide band radios support the entire band from 4.9 to 5.925 GHz.

Gigabit Ethernet Interface provides the maximum transfer rates to the device.

3.5 mm audio jack allows direct connection of headphones without any adapters.

Updated FPGA enhances Packet Processing Power more than 4 times that of the 450 SM.

Capable of up to 310 Mbps aggregate in a 40 MHz channel.
Table 5 gives a summary of the main PMP 450b Series characteristics.
Table 5 Main characteristics of the PMP 450b Series
Characteristic
Value
Topology
PMP
Wireless link
condition
LOS, near LOS or non-LOS
Range
PMP: Up to 40 mi (or 64 km)
Duplexing
TDD (symmetric and asymmetric)
Connectivity
100/1000Base-T Ethernet Main port with PoE input
Operating
frequencies
4.9 to 5.925 GHz
Tx Power
Max 27 dBm
Channel
bandwidth
5, 10, 15, 20, 30, and 40 MHz
Note
All bands do not support all channel bandwidths. For more information, refer to
this link.
Spectral
efficiency
Up to 7.5 bps/Hz
Timing
synchronization
CMM4, CMM5, or UGPS
Data rate
Up to 310 Mbps (40 MHz channel BW) for PMP
Page 1-7
Chapter 1: Product description
Overview of the 450 Platform Family
Frequency bands
The PMP 450b Series ODU can operate in the following band:

5 GHz band: 4900 to 5925 MHz
Hardware components
The ODU (Outdoor unit) is a self-contained transceiver unit that houses both radio and networking
electronics. The main hardware components of the PMP 450b Series are as follows:

PMP 450b SM
The PMP 450b Series is supplied in the following configurations:
Table 6 PMP 450b Series hardware configurations
ODU
Frequency
ODU type
PMP 450b
SM
4.9 to 5.925 GHz
Integrated
(support 4.9, 5.1, 5.2, 5.4
and 5.8 GHz)
Page 1-8
17 dBi flat panel antenna
Chapter 1: Product description
Overview of the 450 Platform Family
PMP/PTP 450 Series
Cambium PMP/PTP 450 Series networks are designed for wireless point-to-multipoint and point-to-point
links in the unlicensed/licensed 900 MHz, 2.4 GHz, 3.5 GHz, 3.65 GHz, 5.4 GHz and 5.8 GHz bands.
Users must ensure that the PMP/PTP 450 Series complies with local operating regulations.
The PMP/PTP 450 Series enables network operators to grow their business by offering more capacity for
data, voice and video applications.
Key features
The Cambium PMP/PTP 450 Series offers the following benefits:

Cambium’s point-to-multipoint and point-to-point solution, with up to 310 Mbps usable throughput

State-of-the-art MIMO (Multi In Multi Out) technology

Efficient GPS synchronized, scheduled TDD operation for easy Access Point site deployment and
performance that is consistent regardless of subscriber loading

A range of cost-effective subscriber device solutions to meet the business case of a network
application

MIMO-B Mode: This technique provides for the ability to double the throughput of a radio
transmission under proper RF conditions. Different data streams are transmitted simultaneously on
two different antennas.

MIMO-A mode: This mode of operation using the same modulation levels as the MIMO-B mode,
namely: QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-QAM and 256-QAM but it provides an additional combining gain.
Table 7 gives a summary of PMP/PTP 450 Series products main characteristics .
Page 1-9
Chapter 1: Product description
Overview of the 450 Platform Family
Table 7 Main characteristics of the PMP/PTP 450 Series
Characteristic
Value
Topology
PMP/PTP
Wireless link condition
LOS, near LOS or non-LOS
Range
Up to 40 mi (or 64 km) for PMP
Up to 186 mi (or 299 km) for PTP
Duplexing
TDD (symmetric and asymmetric)
Connectivity
100Base-T Ethernet Main port with PoE input
Operating frequencies
900 MHz, 2.4 GHz, 3.5 GHz, 3.65 GHz and 5 GHz
Tx Power
max 22 dBm (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz)
max 25 dBm (3.5 GHz and 3.65 GHz)
max 25 dBm (900 MHz - PMP 450 SM and BH)
Channel bandwidth
5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, and 40 MHz
All bands do not support all channel bandwidths. For more
information, refer to this link.
High spectral efficiency
Up to 7.5 bps/Hz
Timing synchronization
CMM4 or UGPS
Data rate
Up to 310 Mbps (40 MHz channel BW) for PMP/PTP
Frequency bands
The PMP/PTP 450 Series ODU can operate in the following bands:

900 MHz band: 902 to 928 MHz (SM and BH)

2.4 GHz band: 2400 to 2483 MHz

3.5 GHz band: 3300 to 3600 MHz

3.65 GHz band: 3500 to 3850 MHz

5 GHz band: 5470 to 5875 MHz
Page 1-10
Chapter 1: Product description
Overview of the 450 Platform Family
Hardware components
The main hardware components of the PMP/PTP 450 are as follows:

PMP 450 AP

PMP 450 SM

PTP 450 BH (BHM/BHS)
The PMP/PTP 450 is supplied in the following configurations:
Table 8 PMP/PTP 450 Series hardware configurations
ODU
Frequency
ODU type
PMP 450 AP
2.4 GHz
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
Integrated
18 dBi Dual Slant
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
Integrated
16 dBi Dual Slant
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
900 MHz
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
2.4 GHz
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
Integrated
7 dBi Dual Slant, integrated patch
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
Integrated
8 dBi Dual Slant, integrated patch
Integrated
19 dBi Flat Plate, integrated patch
5 GHz
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
(5.4 and 5.8 GHz)
Integrated
9 dBi H+V, integrated patch
Integrated
25 dBi H+V, Integrated dish
902 to 928 MHz
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
3.5/3.65 GHz
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
Integrated
8 dBi Dual Slant
5 GHz
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
(5.4 and 5.8 GHz)
Integrated
9 dBi H+V
3.5/3.65 GHz
5 GHz
(5.4 and 5.8 GHz)
PMP 450 SM
3.5/3.65 GHz
PTP 450 BH
Note
The BH ODU can be configured as a BHM or a BHS in PTP mode
Page 1-11
Chapter 1: Product description
Overview of the 450 Platform Family
Supported interoperability for 450m/450i/450b/450
Series
The supported interoperability among various 450m/450i/450 Series hardwares are listed below:
Table 9 Supported Interoperability for PMP
Band
AP
SM
5.1, 5.2 and 5.9 GHz
PMP 450m AP
PMP 450i SM, PMP 450b SM
4.9, 5.1, 5.2 and 5.9 GHz
PMP 450i AP
PMP 450i SM, PMP 450b SM
PMP 450m AP
5.4 and 5.8 GHz
PMP 450i AP
PMP 450i SM, PMP 450 SM, PMP 450d SM,
and PMP 450b SM
PMP 450 AP
PMP 450 AP
PMP 450 SM, PMP 450i SM
PMP 450i AP
PMP 450i SM, PMP 450 SM
2.4 GHz
PMP 450 AP
PMP 450 SM
900 MHz
PMP 450i AP
PMP 450 SM
3.5 and 3.65 GHz
Table 10 Supported Interoperability for PTP
Band
BH
900 MHz
PTP 450 BHM and BHS
3.5 and 3.65 GHz
PTP 450/450i BHM and BHS
4.9, 5.1, 5.2, 5.4 and 5.8 GHz
PTP 450i BHM and BHS
5.4 and 5.8 GHz
PTP 450/450i BHM and BHS
Page 1-12
Chapter 1: Product description
Overview of the 450 Platform Family
Typical deployment
The 450 Platform Family is an “all outdoor” solution consisting of a wireless bridge across sites. Each site
installation consists of an Integrated or Connectorized outdoor unit (ODU) and a power supply (PSU) (see
Figure 1). The ODU provides the following interfaces:

Ethernet port: This provides proprietary power over Ethernet and connection to the management
and/or data networks.
Figure 1 PMP/PTP 450 Platform Family typical bridge deployment
Build ing 1
Build ing 2
ODU
Light ning
prot ection unit s
ODU
Pow er over Ethernet
interface
PSU
Light ning
prot ection unit s
PSU
AC supply
A C supply
Netw or k
eq uip ment
Netw or k
eq uip ment
Page 1-13
Chapter 1: Product description
Overview of the 450 Platform Family
Point-to-Multipoint
The PMP configuration of 450 Platform Family consists of Access Point (AP) and Subscriber Module (SM)
ODU. The radio link operates on a single frequency channel in each direction using Time Division Duplex
(TDD).
Applications for the PMP Series include:

High throughput enterprise applications

nLOS video surveillance in metro areas

Urban area network extension

Network extension into areas with foliage
Point-to-Point (Backhaul)
The PTP configuration of 450 Platform Family consists of two BH (Backhaul) ODUs. The customer can
decide, via software configuration, if this unit is a BHM (Backhaul Master) or a BHS (Backhaul Slave). The
radio link operates on a single frequency channel using Time Division Duplex (TDD).
Applications for the PTP Series include:

Enterprise Access

nLOS video surveillance

Leased line replacements and backup solutions

Network extension
Page 1-14
Chapter 1: Product description
Overview of the 450 Platform Family
Product variants
The 450 Platform Family is available in the following product variants:

The ODU is supplied in the following regional variants:
o FCC, intended for deployment in the USA
o EU, intended for deployment in countries of the European Union or other countries following ETSI
regulations
o Rest of the World (RoW), intended for deployment in countries other than USA and EU countries.
o IC, intended for deployment in Canada

A ruggedized ODU Subscriber Module designed to meet IP-66 and IP-67 standards to withstand
harsh environments

An integrated Dish ODU Subscriber Module in a new, rugged and high gain design for 5 GHz band

An indoor power supply module providing Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) supply to ODU (AP/SM/BH)

Antennas and antenna cabling: Connectorized ODUs require external antennas connected using RF
cable

Ethernet cabling: All configurations require a copper Ethernet Cat5e connection from the ODU
(Ethernet port) to the PoE

Lightning protection unit (LPU): LPUs are installed in the ports copper drop cables to provide transient
voltage surge suppression

Surge Suppression: The Gigabit Surge Suppressor provides a path to ground (Protective Earth) that
protects connected radio equipment from near-miss lightning strikes.

Ground cables: ODU, LPUs and outdoor copper Ethernet cables are bonded to the site grounding
system using ground cables.
For more information about these components, including interfaces, specifications and Cambium part
numbers, refer to Chapter 2: System hardware.
Page 1-15
Chapter 1: Product description
Wireless operation
Wireless operation
This section describes how the 450 Platform Family wireless link is operated, including modulation
modes, power control and security.
Time division duplexing
The system uses Time Division Duplexing (TDD) – one channel alternately transmits and receives rather
than using one channel for transmitting and a second channel for receiving. To accomplish TDD, the
AP/BHM must provide sync to its SM/BHS. Furthermore, collocated APs/BHMs must be synced together
– an unsynchronized AP/BHM that transmits during the receive cycle of a collocated AP/BHM can prevent
a second AP/BHM from being able to decode the signals from its APs/BHSs. In addition, across a
geographical area, APs/BHMs that can “hear” each other benefit from using a common sync to further
reduce self-interference within the network.
Modules use TDD on a common frequency to divide frames for uplink (orange) and downlink (green)
usage, as shown in the figure below.
For more information on synchronization configuration options, see GPS synchronization on page 2-45.
Figure 2 TDD frame division
Time
Page 1-16
Chapter 1: Product description
Wireless operation
TDD frame parameters
The TDD burst duration varies depending on the following:

Channel Bandwidth

Cyclic Prefix

Frame Period

Frame configuration - Downlink Data

Link operation – Dynamic Rate Adaptation
OFDM and channel bandwidth
The PMP/PTP 450 Platform Family transmits using Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM).
This wideband signal consists of many equally spaced sub-carriers. Although each sub carrier is
modulated at a low rate using conventional modulation schemes, the resultant data rate from the subcarriers is high. OFDM works exceptionally over a Non-Line-of-Sight (NLoS) channel.
The channel bandwidth of the OFDM signal is configurable to one of the following values: 5, 7, 10, 15, 20
and 30 MHz. Higher bandwidths provide greater link capacity at the expense of using more bandwidth.
Systems configured for a narrower channel bandwidth provide better receiver sensitivity and can also be
an appropriate choice in deployments where the amount of free spectrum is limited.
Note
The channel bandwidth must be configured to the same value at both ends of the link. Not
all channel bandwidths are available in all regulatory bands.
Cyclic Prefix
OFDM technology uses a cyclic prefix, where a portion of the end of a symbol (slot) is repeated at the
beginning of the symbol (slot) to allow multi-pathing to settle before receiving the desired data. A 1/16
cyclic prefix means that for every 16 bits of throughput data transmitted, an additional bit is used. For your
convenience, the 450 Platform Family ODUs have been locked to a 1/16 CP.
Frame Period
The frame period or frame duration is the time between the beginning of a frame and the end of the
frame. The 450 Platform Family supports two frame periods: 2.5 ms and 5 ms.
Note
PMP 450m AP supports 2.5 ms Frame Period only.
The 5ms frame period configuration provides higher throughput as a result of reduced frame overhead
during transmission. In turn, the 2.5 ms frame period configuration affords reduced latency in the system,
half of that introduced by the 5 ms frame configuration.
Page 1-17
Chapter 1: Product description
Wireless operation
Frame configuration - Downlink Data
The percentage of frame assigned to transport downlink data. The downlink data specifies the percentage
of the aggregate throughput for the downlink (frames transmitted from the AP/BHM to the subscriber).
The configurable range is 15% to 85%.
Note
The maximum configurable range is 34% to 66% for 40 MHz with 5 ms frame.
Link operation – Dynamic Rate Adapt
The 450 Platform Family ODUs offer eight levels or speeds of operation – 2X MIMO-B and 1X MIMO-A
(QPSK), 4X MIMO-B and 2X MIMO-A (16-QAM), 6x MIMO-B and 3X MIMO-A (64-QAM) and 8X MIMO-B
and 4X MIMO-A (265-QAM). If received power varies due to distance between the AP/BHM and the
SM/BHS or due to obstructions, or if interference affects the RF environment, the system automatically
and dynamically adjusts the links to the best operation level.
The system chooses its modulation rate dynamically, based on an internal ARQ (Automatic Repeat
reQuest) error control method. With ARQ, every data slot of every frame sent over the air (except
downlink broadcast) is expected to be acknowledged by the receiver, and if acknowledgement is not
received, the data is resent. The sending unit monitors these re-sends and adjusts the modulation rate
accordingly. It is normal to have links that change levels of operation as the RF environment changes.
Furthermore, the uplink or downlink portions of TDD duty cycle operate independently.
The various modulation levels used by 450 Platform Family are shown in Table 11.
Table 11 Modulation levels
Rate
MIMO-B
MIMO-A
QPSK
2X MIMO-B
1X MIMO-A
16-QAM
4X MIMO-B
2X MIMO-A
64-QAM
6X MIMO-B
3X MIMO-A
256-QAM
8X MIMO-B
4X MIMO-A
Note
MIMO-A achieves half the throughput of MIMO-B but adds a combining diversity (gain) which
enhances the link budget or availability.
Page 1-18
Chapter 1: Product description
Wireless operation
Encryption
The 450 Platform Family supports optional encryption for data transmitted over the wireless link. The 450
Platform Family supports the following forms of encryption for security of the wireless link:

DES (Data Encryption Standard): An over-the-air link encryption option that uses secret 56-bit keys
and 8 parity bits. DES performs a series of bit permutations, substitutions, and recombination
operations on blocks of data. DES encryption does not affect the performance or throughput of the
system.

AES (Advanced Encryption Standard): An over-the-air link encryption option that uses the Rijndael
algorithm and 128-bit keys and 256-bit key size to establish a higher level of security than DES. AES
products are certified as compliant with the Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS 197) in
the U.S.A.
The default setting on an AP is "Disabled".
MIMO
Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) techniques provide protection against fading and increase the
probability that the receiver decodes a usable signal. When the effects of MIMO are combined with those
of OFDM techniques and a high link budget, there is a high probability of a robust connection over a nonline-of-sight path.
The sub-features that comprises the MIMO techniques utilized in the 450 Platform Family ODUs are:

MIMO-A: This technique enables 450 Platform Family radio to use a scheme that optimizes coverage
by transmitting the same data over both antennas. This redundancy improves the signal to noise ratio
at the receiver making it more robust.

MIMO-B: This technique provides the ability to double the throughput of a radio transmission under
proper RF conditions. Different data streams are transmitted simultaneously on two different
antennas.
MU-MIMO
Multiple-input multiple-output, or MIMO, is a range of technologies used to multiply the capacity of a
wireless connection without requiring more spectrum.
Although traditional MIMO techniques are focused on increasing the bandwidth available between two
wireless nodes, multi-user MIMO (MU-MIMO) applies these technologies to increase overall wireless
network capacity by allowing an access point to communicate wirelessly with more than one wireless
node at once.
A MU-MIMO access point features an array of antennas. When the AP decides to communicate with
multiple nodes at the same time, it creates multiple simultaneous beams each directed to a specific node.
This is contrast to a traditional wireless system, where two wireless nodes cannot communicate on the
same channel to the same access point at the same time, without causing significant self-interference
and degrading the overall wireless network performance.
Page 1-19
Chapter 1: Product description
Wireless operation
A MU-MIMO access point estimates and measures what a transmission from each wireless node ‘sounds
like’, by applying knowledge of the wireless path characteristics between the access point and node.
Known as channel estimation, this process is of vital importance; without it, the access point cannot
distinguish properly between wireless nodes, affecting performance.
Channel estimation is achieved by the access point sending a specific signal to a wireless node, which
the node then reflects back. By measuring how the signal was received back from the node, the access
point can estimate the wireless conditions between itself and the node, and know to expect these same
conditions to be applied to other communications from that node. This is known as channel sounding.
Channel estimation and sounding must be regularly repeated to ensure wireless network performance
remains high; the speed at which a system is able to accurately estimate the channel has a large impact
on performance.
Once channel estimation is completed for a wireless node, the MU-MIMO access point can electrically
tune each antenna to provide the highest performance for that node. The access point uses beamforming
to create a radio beam to that node which is tuned for optimum performance and avoids beams directed
to other nodes, reducing interference and helping to improve overall wireless network capacity.
A MU-MIMO access point can communicate to multiple wireless nodes simultaneously using this process.
As the majority of nodes are unable to make full use of the whole access point capacity at once,
communicating with several nodes simultaneously can greatly improve the overall capacity achieved in
the wireless network.
Page 1-20
Chapter 1: Product description
System management
System management
This section introduces the 450 Platform Family management system, including the web interface,
installation, configuration, alerts and upgrades.
Management agent
The 450 Platform Family radios are managed through an embedded management agent.
Management workstations, network management systems or PCs can be connected to this agent using
the module’s Ethernet port or over-the air (SM/BHS)
The management agent supports the following interfaces:

Hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP)

Hypertext transfer protocol secure (HTTPS)

RADIUS authentication

Simple network management protocol (SNMP) – v2c and v3

Network time protocol (NTP)

System logging (Syslog)

Wireless Manager (WM) software

Canopy Network Updater Tool (CNUT) software

cnMaestro™
Web server
The 450 Platform Family management agent contains a web server. The web server supports access via
the HTTP/HTTPS interface.
Web-based management offers a convenient way to manage the 450 Platform Family radios from a
locally connected computer or from a network management workstation connected through a
management network, without requiring any special management software. The web and SNMP are the
interfaces supported for installation of 450 Platform Family radios and for the majority of configuration
management tasks.
Page 1-21
Chapter 1: Product description
System management
Web pages
The web-based management interfaces provide comprehensive web-based fault, configuration,
performance and security management functions organized into the following groups:
Access Point or Backhaul Master:

Home

Configuration

Statistics

Tools

Logs

Accounts

Quick Start

Copyright
Subscriber Module or Backhaul Slave

Home

Configuration

Statistics

Tools

Logs

Accounts

PDA

Copyright
Identity-based user accounts

When identity-based user accounts are configured, a security officer can define from one to four user
accounts, each of which may have one of the four possible roles:

ADMINISTRATOR, who has full read and write permissions. This is the level of the root and admin
users, as well as any other administrator accounts that one of them creates.

INSTALLER, who has permissions identical to those of ADMINISTRATOR except that the installer
cannot add or delete users or change the password of any other user.

TECHNICIAN, who has permissions to modify basic radio parameters and view informational web
pages

GUEST, who has no write permissions and only a limited view of General Status tab

Admin, Installer and Tech accounts can be configured as READ-ONLY. This will allow the account to
only see the items.
See Managing module access by passwords for detailed information on account permissions.
Page 1-22
Chapter 1: Product description
System management
Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS)
The PMP configuration of 450 Platform Family includes support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial
In User Service) protocol functionality including:

SM Authentication: Allows only known SMs onto the network (blocking “rogue” SMs), and can be
configured to ensure SMs are connecting to a known network (preventing SMs from connecting to
“rogue” APs). RADIUS authentication is used for SMs, but not used for APs.

SM Configuration: Configures authenticated SMs with MIR (Maximum Information Rate), High
Priority, and VLAN (Virtual LAN) parameters from the RADIUS server when a SM registers to an AP.

User Authentication allows users to configure a separate User authentication server along with
the SM authentication server. If firmware is upgraded while using this functionality and no User
authentication servers are configured, then AP continues to use the SM authentication server for User
authentication

SM Accounting provides support for RADIUS accounting messages for usage-based billing. This
accounting includes indications for subscriber session establishment, subscriber session
disconnection, and bandwidth usage per session for each SM that connects to the AP.

Centralized AP and SM user name and password management: Allows AP and SM usernames and
access levels (Administrator, Installer, Technician and Read-Only) to be centrally administered in the
RADIUS server instead of on each radio and tracks access events (logon/logoff) for each username
on the RADIUS server. This accounting does not track and report specific configuration actions
performed on radios or pull statistics such as bit counts from the radios. Such functions require an
Element Management System (EMS) such as Cambium Wireless Manager. This accounting is not
the ability to perform accounting functions on the subscriber/end user/customer account.

Framed-IP-Address: Operators may use a RADIUS server to assign management IP addressing to
SM modules. SNMP
The management agent supports fault and performance management by means of an SNMP interface.
The management agent is compatible with SNMP v2c and SNMP v3 using Management Information
Base (MIB) files which are available for download from the Cambium Networks Support website:
https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/ptp450
https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/pmp450
Network Time Protocol (NTP)
The clock supplies accurate date and time information to the system. It can be set to run with or without a
connection to a network time server (NTP). It can be configured to display local time by setting the time
zone and daylight saving in the Time web page.
If an NTP server connection is available, the clock can be set to synchronize with the server time at
regular intervals. The 450 Platform Family radios may receive NTP data from a CMM4 module or an NTP
server configured in the system’s management network.
Page 1-23
Chapter 1: Product description
System management
The Time Zone option is configurable on the AP’s/BHM’s Time Configuration page, and may be used to
offset the received NTP time to match the operator’s local time zone. When set on the AP/BHM, the offset
is set for the entire sector (AP/BHSs is notified of the current Time Zone upon initial registration). If a Time
Zone change is applied, the AP/BHSs are notified of the change in a best effort fashion, meaning some
AP/BHSs may not pick up the change until the next re-registration. Time Zone changes are noted in the
Event Log.
An AP/BHM which is receiving NTP date and time information from an NTP server or from a GPS
synchronization source may be used as an NTP server. Any client which has IP connectivity to the BHM
may request NTP date and time information from the AP/BHM. No additional configuration (other than the
AP/BHM receiving valid NTP data) is required to use the AP/BHM as an NTP server.
Wireless Manager (WM)
Cambium Networks Wireless Manager 4.0 is recommended for managing 450 Platform Family networks.
You can achieve better uptime through better visibility of your network with the Cambium Wireless
Manager. This network management software tool offers breakthrough map-based visualization
capabilities using embedded Google maps, and combined with advanced configuration, provisioning,
alerting and reporting features you can control your entire outdoor wireless network including Point-toMultipoint and Point-to-Point solutions as well as other SNMP enabled devices. With its powerful user
interface you can not only be able to control your network's access, distribution and backhaul layers, but
can also have visibility to WLAN sites and be able to quickly launch indoor network management
systems. Some key features of Wireless Manager are:

Template-Based Configuration: With Wireless Manager's user-defined templates you can
accelerate the process for the configuration of the devices you add to your network resulting in
quicker and easier deployments. The template-based functionality provides an automated way to
configure large numbers of network devices with just a few mouse clicks, and can be scheduled to
occur at any time via Wireless Manager's Task Scheduler.

Ultralight Thin Client: With the growing mobile workforce it is important to have access to the status
of your network at any time. With Wireless Manager you can view the status and performance of your
entire wireless network via a compact web interface accessible by your smart phone.

Map-Based Visualization: Wireless Manager overlays sophisticated real-time information about your
network elements onto building layouts and dynamic Google maps. Visuals can be scaled to view an
entire city or building or a specific area, floor or link.

High Availability Architecture Support: Wireless Manager offers a high availability option, providing
a highly reliable and redundant network management solution that ensures you always have
management access to your network.

High Scalability: The enhanced Wireless Manager offers you server scalability with support for up to
10,000 nodes as well as support for distributed server architecture.
Cambium’s Wireless Manager 4.0 available for download at:
http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/management-tools/wireless-manager/
Page 1-24
Chapter 1: Product description
System management
Canopy Network Updater Tool (CNUT)
CNUT (Canopy Network Updater Tool) is the stand-alone software update tool for 450 Platform Family
ODUs. The CNUT 4.10.4 or greater should be used for 450 Platform Family ODUs.
The Canopy Network Updater Tool has the following features:

Automatically discovers all network elements

HTTP and HTTPS

Executes UDP command that initiates and terminates the Auto-update mode within APs/BHMs. This
command is both secure and convenient:


For security, the AP/BHM accepts this command from only the IP address that specified in the
Configuration page of ODU.
For convenience, Network Updater automatically sets this Configuration parameter in the
AP/BHM to the IP address of the Network Updater server when the server performs any of the
update commands.
Allows you to choose among updating:
Entire network.
Only elements that you select.
Only network branches that you select.
Provides a Script Engine that you can use with any script which:
The user can define.
Cambium supplies.
CNUT is available at:
http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/management-tools/cnut/
cnMaestro™
cnMaestro™ is a cloud-based or on-premises platform specialized for secure, end-to-end network
lifecycle management: inventory management, device onboarding, daily operations, and maintenance.
The cnMaestro wireless network manager simplifies device management by offering full network visibility.
Network operators can have a real-time view of their complete end-to-end network and perform a full
suite of wireless network management functions to optimize system availability, maximize throughput, and
meet emerging needs of business and residential customers. In addition, the cnMaestro wireless network
manager collects and displays compliance with service level agreements.
To learn about cnMaestro™, please visit http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/products/softwaretools/cnmaestro/
See Configuring cnMaestroTM Connectivity on 7-220 for details.
Page 1-25
Chapter 1: Product description
System management
Radio recovery mode
The 450 Platform Family recovery mode provides a means to recover from serious configuration errors
including lost or forgotten passwords and unknown IP addresses.
The recovery procedure for 450m/450i/450b series and 450 series ODUs differ due to difference in
hardwares. This procedure for 450i/450m Series is known as Radio Recovery Console and for 450 Series
is known as Default mode (or Default/Override Plug).
Radio Recovery Console – 450i, 450b and 450m Series
The Radio Recovery Console mode supports:

Restoring factory default IP address 169.254.1.1 and password

Boot with factory default Canopy system software settings

Load previously installed SW images
See Radio Recovery Console– PMP/PTP 450i/450b and PMP 450m on page 9-36.
Default Mode (or Default Plug) – 450 Series
A default plug is available to provide access to a module whose password and/or IP address have been
forgotten.
This plug allows the 450 Series ODUs to be accessed using IP address 169.254.1.1 and no password.
During the override session, you can assign any new IP address and set either or both user passwords
(display-only and/or full access) as well as make other parameter changes.
See Default Mode (or Default/Override Plug) - PMP/PTP 450 on page 9-39.
Page 1-26
Chapter 2:
System hardware
This chapter describes the hardware components of a 450 Platform link.
The following topics are described in this chapter:

System Components on page 2-2 describes system components of PTP and PMP including its
accessories

Cabling on page 2-33 describes about various cables.

Lightning protection unit (LPU) and grounding kit on page 2-41 describes about lightning protection
and grounding kit

Antennas and antenna cabling on page 2-43 describes supported antennas and its accessories

GPS synchronization on page 2-45 describes UGPS and CMM4.

Ordering the components on page 2-60 specifies Cambium part numbers for 450 Platform Family
components
Page 2-1
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
System Components
Point-to-Multipoint (PMP)
The PMP radio is a transceiver device. It is a connectorized or radiated outdoor unit containing all the
radio, networking, and surge suppression electronics. It can be purchased as:

Access Point Module (AP)

Subscriber Module (SM)
PMP 450 Platform Family Integrated or Connectorized ODU
The PMP 450i Series and PMP 450 Series ODUs are supplied in Integrated or Connectorized
configurations. The PMP 450m Series AP is supplied in Integrated configuration only.
See Table 2 PMP 450m Series hardware configurations on page 1-3
See Table 4 PMP/PTP 450i Series hardware configurations on page 1-5
See Table 6 PMP 450b Series hardware configurations on page 1-8
See Table 8 PMP/PTP 450 Series hardware configurations on page 1-11
Product variants
Table 12 PMP 450m Series variants
Variant
Region
Antenna
Frequency
Range
Channel
Bandwidth
Max
EIRP
5150 – 5925
MHz
5, 10, 15, 20, 40
MHz
42 dBm
FCC
RoW
5 GHz
PMP 450m AP
EU
DES only
90° integrated
sector array, 14x14
MIMO system,
IC
Page 2-2
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Table 13 PMP 450i Series variants
Variant
Region
Antenna
Frequency
Range
Channel
Bandwidth
Max Tx
Power
900 MHz PMP
450i AP
FCC
Connectorized
902 - 928 MHz
5, 7, 10, 15, 20
MHz
25 dBm
FCC, RoW,
Canada,
RoW DES,
Europe
Connectorized
3 GHz PMP
450i AP
3300 – 3900
MHz
5, 7, 10, 15, 20,
30, 40 MHz
25 dBm
5 GHz
PMP 450i AP
FCC, RoW,
Canada,
RoW DES,
Europe
4900 – 5925
MHz
5, 10, 15, 20,
30, 40 MHz
27 dBm
Frequency
Range
Channel
Bandwidth
Max Tx
Power
4900 – 5925
MHz
5, 10, 15, 20,
30, 40 MHz
27 dBm
Integrated 16 dBi
Connectorized
Integrated 16 dBi 90
degree
Table 14 PMP 450b Series variants
Variant
Region
Antenna
5 GHz
PMP 450b SM
FCC, RoW,
Canada,
RoW DES,
Europe
Integrated 16 dBi
Note
The Transmit power is limited based on regional setting.
Page 2-3
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Table 15 PMP 450 Series variants
Variant
Region
Antenna
Frequency
Range
Channel
Bandwidth
Max Tx
Power
900 MHz PMP
450 SM
FCC
Connectorized
902 - 928 MHz
5, 7, 10, 15, 20
MHz
25 dBm
2.4 GHz PMP
450 AP
FCC ISM
Connectorized
2400 – 2483.5
MHz
5, 10, 15, 20
MHz
22 dBm
2.4 GHz PMP
450 SM
FCC ISM
2400 – 2483.5
MHz
5, 10, 15, 20
MHz
22 dBm
3.5 GHz PMP
450 AP
FCC ISM
3300 – 3600
MHz
5, 7, 10, 15, 20,
30, 40 MHz
25 dBm
3300 – 3600
MHz
5, 7, 10, 15, 20,
30, 40 MHz
25 dBm
3500 – 3850
MHz
5, 7, 10, 15, 20,
30, 40 MHz
25 dBm
3500 – 3850
MHz
5, 7, 10, 15, 20,
30, 40 MHz
25 dBm
5470 – 5875
MHz
10, 20 MHz (5,
15 and 30 MHz
not available in
DFS regions)
22 dBm
5470 – 5875
MHz
10, 20 MHz (5,
15 and 30 MHz
not available in
DFS regions)
22 dBm
Integrated 18 dBi
Connectorized
Integrated 7 dBi
Connectorized
Integrated 16 dBi
Connectorized
3.5 GHz PMP
450 SM
FCC ISM
Integrated 8 dBi
Integrated 19 dBi
3.65 GHz PMP
450 AP
FCC ISM
Connectorized
Integrated 16 dBi
Connectorized
3.65 GHz PMP
450 SM
FCC ISM
Integrated 8 dBi
Integrated 19 dBi
Connectorized
5.4/5.8 GHz
PMP 450 AP
FCC, RoW,
RoW DES
5.4/5.8 GHz
PMP 450 SM
FCC, ROW,
RoW DES
Integrated 17 dBi
Connectorized
Integrated 9 dBi
Integrated 25 dBi
Note
The Transmit power is limited based on regional setting.
Page 2-4
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Backhaul (PTP)
The Backhaul radio is a transceiver device. It is a connectorized or integrated outdoor unit containing all
the radio, networking, and surge suppression electronics. It can be configured as:

Backhaul Master (BHM)

Backhaul Slave (BHS)
PTP 450 Platform Family Integrated or Connectorized ODU
See Table 4 PMP/PTP 450i Series hardware configurations on page 1-5
See Table 8 PMP/PTP 450 Series hardware configurations on page 1-11
Product variants
Table 16 PTP 450i Series variants
Variant
Region
Antenna
Connectorized
3 GHz
PTP 450i
FCC,
RoW,
Canada,
Row
DES,
Europe
5 GHz
PTP 450i
FCC,
RoW,
Canada,
Row
DES,
Europe
Integrated 23 dBi
Frequency
Range
Channel
Bandwid
th
Max Tx
Power
Notes
3300 - 3900
MHz
5, 7, 10,
15, 20,
30, 40
MHz
25 dBm
Transmit power
limited based on
regional setting
4900 – 5925
MHz
5, 10, 15,
20, 30,
40 MHz
27 dBm
Transmit power
limited based on
regional setting
Connectorized
Integrated 23 dBi
Page 2-5
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Table 17 PTP 450 Series variants
Variant
Region
Antenna
900 MHz PTP
450 BH
FCC
Connectorized
Frequency
Range
Channel
Bandwidth
Max Tx
Power
902 – 928
MHz
5, 7, 10, 15,
20 MHz
25 dBm
3300 – 3600
MHz
5, 7, 10, 15,
20, 30, 40
MHz
25 dBm
3500 – 3850
MHz
5, 7, 10, 15,
20, 30, 40
MHz
25 dBm
5470 – 5875
MHz
5, 10, 15, 20,
30, 40 MHz
22 dBm
Connectorized
3.5 GHz PTP
450 BH
ROW
Integrated 16 dBi
Integrated 19 dBi
Connectorized
3.65 GHz PTP
450 BH
ROW
Integrated 16 dBi
Integrated 19 dBi
Connectorized
5.4/5.8 GHz
PTP 450 BH
FCC, RoW,
RoW DES
Integrated 9 dBi
Integrated 25 dBi
Note
The Transmit power is limited based on regional setting.
Page 2-6
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
450 Platform Family interfaces
PMP 450m Series interfaces – AP
The 450m Series AP interfaces is illustrated below.
Figure 5 PMP 450m Series interfaces
Carabiner clip
Ground
Lugs
SFP
AUX
PSU/Ethernet
Table 18 PMP 450m Series AP interface descriptions and cabling
Interface
Function
PSU/Ethernet
Power-over-Ethernet, Ethernet
communications (management and data),
CMM5 sync-over-power synchronization input
Aux/Sync
Cabling
RJ45 Cable
See Table 94 on page 5-11
GPS synchronization input and output, UGPS
power output
RJ 45 Cable
Audio tones
See Table 95 on page 5-11
Data
SFP
Read Ethernet communications (management
and data)
Ground Lugs
For grounding the unit
Page 2-7
10 AWG copper wire
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Note
For PMP 450m AP, the Sync-Over-Power is supported with CMM5 only.
For PMP 450m AP, the Sync-Over-Power will not work with CMM4 like PMP 450/450i
Series.
Note
SFP kits (part numbers C000065L008A and C000065L009A) are required for SFP port
connectivity. SFP port is not supported in system release 15.0/15.0.0.1.
PMP/PTP 450i Series interfaces – AP/SM/BH
The AP/SM/BH interfaces are illustrated below.
Figure 5 PMP/PTP 450i interfaces
Carabiner clip
Ground
Lug
RF port A
RF port B
Aux
Gland
ENET
Page 2-8
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Table 19 PMP/PTP 450i Series - AP/SM/BH interface descriptions and cabling
Interface
Function
PSU/Ethernet
Power-over-Ethernet, Ethernet
communications (management and data),
CMM sync-over-power synchronization input
Aux/Sync
Cabling
GPS synchronization input and output, UGPS
power output
Audio tones
RJ45 Cable
See Table 94 on page 5-11
RJ 45 Cable
See Table 95 on page 5-11
Data
RF Port A
Vertical RF connection to antenna
50 ohm RF cable, N-type
RF Port B
Horizontal RF connection to antenna
50 ohm RF cable, N-type
Ground Lugs
For grounding the unit
10 AWG copper wire
Note
If the Aux port will be used, a second Ethernet Gland will need to be ordered (Part Number:
N000065L033A).
PMP 450b Series interfaces - SM
The PMP 450b Series - SM interfaces are illustrated below.
Figure 3 PMP 450b Series - SM interfaces
PSU/Ethernet Port
Audio AUX Port
Page 2-9
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Table 20 PMP 450b Series - SM interface descriptions and cabling
Interface
Function
Cabling
PSU/Ethernet
Power-over-Ethernet, Ethernet
communications (management and data)
RJ45 Cable
Audio AUX Port
3.5 mm audio jack for alignment tone
Standard 3.5 mm TRRS
headphones
PMP/PTP 450 Series interfaces - AP
The PMP 450 Series - AP interfaces are illustrated below.
Figure 4 PMP/PTP 450 Series - AP interfaces
RF Port A
Sync/Default
Ethernet
Page 2-10
RF port B
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Table 21 PMP/PTP 450 Series - AP interface descriptions and cabling – 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
Interface
Function
Cabling
PSU/Ethernet
Power-over-Ethernet, Ethernet
communications (management and data)
RJ45 Cable
GPS synchronization signaling, provides
power to UGPS module. Default plug
port.
RJ11 cable, default
plug.
Sync/Default
RF Port A
2.4 GHz
-45 degree RF connection to AP antenna
5 GHz
Vertical RF connection to AP antenna
2.4 GHz
+45 degree RF connection to AP
antenna
5 GHz
Horizontal RF connection to AP antenna
RF Port B
Ground Lugs
For grounding the unit
PMP/PTP 450 Series interfaces – SM/BH
The PMP 450 Series SM/BH interfaces are illustrated below.
Figure 5 PMP/PTP 450 Series – SM/BH interfaces
Ethernet
Sync/Default
Page 2-11
50 ohm RF cable, Ntype
50 ohm RF cable, Ntype
10 AWG copper wire
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Figure 6 PMP/PTP 450 Series – SM/BH Connectorized interfaces
External antenna
cable path A
(labeled “A”)
External antenna
cable path B (labeled
“B”)
Ground (connectorized models)
Note
As per Underwriters Laboratory (UL) guidelines, the Ground Lug on the radiated SM is not
required.
Page 2-12
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Figure 7 PMP 450d Series - SM Integrated Dish
Figure 8 PMP 450 Series – SM 3 GHz Integrated
Figure 9 PTP 450 Series – BHM/BHS
Page 2-13
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
ATEX/HAZLOC variants
PTP/PMP 450i series products are available in ATEX/Hazloc variants for operation in locations where
explosive gas hazards exist, as defined by Hazloc (USA) and ATEX (Europe). ATEX/HAZLOC variants
are similar to the standard product except that:

ODUs are supplied with the Full capacity license

The frequency range is restricted to 4940 MHz to 5850 MHz

The maximum EIRP generated by ODU is restricted to comply with the ATEX and HAZLOC
standards
In order to meet specific radio regulations in the USA, Canada and the EU, Cambium supplies products
approved for USA, Canada, EU and the rest of the world under different models and part numbers. These
models and part numbers are shown in Table 62 and Table 63.
Page 2-14
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Diagnostic LEDs
The diagnostic LEDs of 450 Platform Family ODUs are as shown below.
Note
The colors shown in the diagram may differ from the actual color displayed by the AP/BHM,
depending on its current status.
AP/BHM LEDs
The diagnostic LEDs report the information about the status of the AP/BHM.
Figure 10 AP/BHM diagnostic LEDs, viewed from unit front
ODU LED Display
LED Labels
PMP 450m Series - AP
MAIN
LNK+ACT/5
AUX
LNK+ACT/4
GPS/3
SES/2
SYN/1
PWR
SES/2
SYN/1
PWR
SES/2
SYN/1
PWR
PMP/PTP 450i Series - AP/BHM
MAIN LNK/5
ACT/4
GPS/3
PMP/PTP 450 Series - AP/BHM
MAIN LNK/5
ACT/4
Page 2-15
GPS/3
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Table 22 AP/BHM LED descriptions
LED
Color when active
Status
information
provided
PWR
Red
DC power
Always lit after 10-20 seconds of power
on.
SYN/1
Yellow
Presence of
sync
SES/2
Green
Unused
GPS/3
Red
Pulse of sync
Lit when the AP/BHM is getting a sync
pulse from a GPS source goes along with
SYN/1
ACT/4
For 450 and 450i
Series
Presence of
data activity on
the Ethernet
link
Flashes during data transfer. Frequency of
flash is not a diagnostic indication.
Yellow
AUX
LNK +
ACT/4
For 450m Series
Red/ Green
(bi-colored for 10/100)
Aux port link
speed and
activity
Notes
Flashes to indicate Ethernet activity on
Aux port. Indicates speed based on the
following colors:
10Base-T : Red
100Base-T : Green
Continuously lit when link is present.
For 450i Series
Red/ Green/Orange
(bi-colored for
10/100/1000)
Activity on Main
port link
Indicates speed based on the following
colors:
10Base-T : Red
100Base-T : Green
1000Base-T : Orange
MAIN
LNK/5
Continuously lit when link is present.
For 450 AP
10Base-T : Orange
Orange/Green/Yellow
(10/100/1000)
100Base-T : Green
Ethernet link
Continuously lit when link is present.
For 450 BHM
10Base-T : Green
Green
MAIN
LNK +
ACT/5
For 450m Series
Red/ Green/Orange
(bi-colored for
10/100/1000)
1000Base-T : Yellow
100Base-T : Green
Main port link
speed and
activity
Page 2-16
Flashes to indicate data transfer speed
and activity.
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
SM/BHS LEDs
The SM/BHS LEDs provide different status of radio based on the operating modes. A SM/BHS in
“operating” mode registers and passes traffic normally. A SM/BHS in “aiming” mode does not register or
pass the traffic, but displays (via LED panel) the strength of received radio signals (based on radio
channel selected via Tools -> Alignment).
Figure 11 AP/BH diagnostic LEDs, viewed from unit front
ODU LED Display
LED Labels
PMP/PTP 450i Series - SM/BHS
MAIN LNK/5
ACT/4
GPS/3
SES/2
SYN/1
PWR
SES/2
SYN/1
STDBY/
PWR
SES/2
SYN/1
PWR
PMP 450b Series - SM
LNK/SPD/
ACT/4
GPS/3
PMP/PTP 450 Series - SM/BHS
MAIN LNK/5
ACT/4
Page 2-17
GPS/3
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Table 23 SM/BHS LED descriptions
Status information provided
LED
Color when
active
PWR
Red
STDBY/
PWR
Yellow/Blue
SYN/1
Yellow
Presence of sync
SES/2
Green
Session Indicator
GPS/3
Red
Unused
ACT/4
Yellow
Presence of data
activity
on the Ethernet link
LNK/SP
D/ACT/4
MAIN
LNK/5
SM / BHS in
“Operating” Mode
SM / BHS in
“Aiming” Mode
Always lit after 10-20 seconds
of power on.
DC power
DC power
Ethernet Link
Flashes Yellow during boot-up.
Flashes Blue when operating.
These three LEDs
act as a bar graph
to indicate the
relative quality of
alignment. As
power level
improves during
alignment, more of
these LEDs are lit.
Lit when SM/BHS is in sync
with an AP/BHM.
Presence of data
activity
on the Ethernet link
Flashes during data transfer.
Frequency of flash is not a
diagnostic indication.
For 450b
Series
Red/Green/Oran
ge
(10/100/1000)
Notes
Ethernet Link
Lit when SM/BHS is in session.
Unused
Flashes during data transfer.
Frequency of flash is not a
diagnostic indication.
10Base-T : Red
100Base-T : Green
1000Base-T : Orange
For 450i Series
Red/ Green/
Orange
(bi-colored for
10/100/1000)
Ethernet link
Ethernet link
Flashes during data transfer.
10Base-T : Red
100Base-T : Green
1000Base-T : Orange
For 450 Series
Green
Ethernet link
Ethernet link
Continuously lit when link is
present.
Page 2-18
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Operating Mode

Scanning: If the SM/BHS is not registered to AP/BHM, then these three LEDs cycle on and off from
left to right (SYN/1, SES/2 and GPS/3).

Ethernet Link:
o For 450m AP, the MAIN LNK + ACT/5 LED is active when the Main port link is present and the
AUX LNK + ACT/4 LED is active when the Aux port link is present.
o For 450/450i AP/BHM, the MAIN LNK/5 LED is lit continuously when the link is present.
o For 450/450i SM/BHS, the MAIN LNK/5 LED is lit continuously when the link is present.

Data Transfer:
o For 450m AP, the MAIN LNK + ACT/5 LED flashes to indicate data transfer speed and activity on
the Main port and the AUX LNK + ACT/4 LED flashes to indicate data transfer speed and activity
on the Aux port.
o For 450/450i AP/BHM, the ACT/4 LED flashes during data transfer.
o For 450/450i SM/BHS, the ACT/4 LED flashes during data transfer.
o For 450b SM, the LNK/SPD/ACT/4 LED flashes during data transfer.
Aiming Mode
The 3 LEDs (SYN/1, SES/2, and GPS/3) are turned into a 3-position bar graph. The more LEDs that are
lit, the better the received power the module is seeing. The colors of the LEDS have no particular
meaning other than to assist is distinguishing one position from the next.
Power supply options
The 450 Platform Family ODUs are powered over its Main Ethernet cable using Power Over Ethernet
(POE). The power injector is connected to the ODU and network terminating equipment using Cat5e
cable with RJ45 connectors.
Power supply – PMP 450m Series
The PMP 450m Series - AP supports powering from AC+DC Enhanced Power Injector (see AC+DC
Enhanced Power Injector on page 2-22)
PSU part numbers
Table 24 PSU part numbers for PMP 450m AP
Cambium description
Cambium part number
AC+DC Enhanced Power Injector
C000065L002C
Page 2-19
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Power supply – PMP/PTP 450i Series
The PMP/PTP 450i Series supports powering from the following powering sources:

Power Supply, 60 W, 56 V with 1000BASE-T or GigE

AC+DC Enhanced Power Injector

Power over Ethernet midspan, 60 W, -48 VDC Input

CMM4 with external 56 V power supply and CMM4 to 450i Series ODU cable (Dongle)

IEEE802.3at power injector
Note
The 900 MHz SM is based off of the 450 Series , please see Power supply –
PMP/PTP 450 Series on page 2-26.
Warning
Always use an appropriately rated and approved AC supply cord-set in
accordance with the regulations of the country of use.
Warning
The PMP 450 Ruggedized High Gain Integrated Subscriber Module (Cambium
part numbers C035045C014A and C036045C014A), while encapsulated in a 450itype enclosure, contains 450 circuitry which must be powered via 30
VDC. Powering these SMs with a 56 VDC will damage the device.
Please refer to Cabling on Page 2-33 for details on maximum cable lengths between power injector and
PMP/PTP 450i.
PSU part numbers
Table 25 PSU part numbers for PMP/PTP 450i Series
Cambium description
Cambium part number
Power supply, 60 W, 56 V with Gbps support
N000065L001B
AC+DC Enhanced Power Injector
C000065L002C
Line Cord, Fig 8 – US
N000065L003A
Line Cord, Fig 8 – UK
N000065L004A
Line Cord, Fig 8 – EU
N000065L005A
Power over Ethernet midspan, 60 W, -48 VDC Input
N000000L036A
Power supply, 30 W, 56 V – Gbps support
N000000L034A
Page 2-20
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
AC Power Injector N000065L001B
The AC Power Injector interfaces are shown in Figure 12 and described in Table 26.
Figure 12 AC Power Injector interfaces
Table 26 AC Power Injector interface functions
Interface
Function
AC power in
AC power input (main supply)
ODU
RJ45 socket for connecting Cat5e cable to ODU
LAN
RJ45 socket for connecting Cat5e cable to network
Power (green) LED
Power supply detection
Page 2-21
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
AC+DC Enhanced Power Injector C000065L002C
The AC+DC Enhanced Power Injector interfaces are shown in Figure 13 and described in Table 27.
Figure 13 AC+DC Enhanced Power Injector interfaces
Page 2-22
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Table 27 AC+DC Enhanced Power Injector interface functions
Interface
Function
100-240V 47-63Hz 1.7A
AC power input (main supply)
DC In
Alternative DC power supply input
DC Out
DC power output to a second PSU (for power supply redundancy) or to a
NIDU
ODU
RJ45 socket for connecting Cat5e cable to ODU
LAN
RJ45 socket for connecting Cat5e cable to network
Power - AC (green) LED
Indicates power is applied at the AC power input
Power - DC (green) LED
Indicates power is applied at the DC In port
Ethernet (yellow) LED
Detects Ethernet traffic and it is used with PTP650 and PTP700 families
only. It does not operate with the 450 platform products.
Note
The earlier power injector models only had a single power LED that combined the
AC+DC indications.
Page 2-23
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
-48 VDC Power Injector N000000L036A
The DC Power Injector interfaces are shown in Figure 14 and described in Table 28.
Figure 14 -48 V DC Power Injector interfaces
Table 28 -48V DC Power Injector interfaces
Interface
Function
DC input
36 to 60V, 2A
RJ 45 Sockets
Two (Data In and Data & Power Out)
LEDs
Two (AC and Port)
Page 2-24
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Power supply – PMP 450b Series
The PMP 450b Series support powering from the following powering sources:

Gigabit Enet Capable Power Supply – 20 to 32 V DC, 15W

CMM4 with external 29 V power supply
Figure 15 -20 to 32 VDC Power Injector interfaces
Table 29 -Power Injector interfaces
Interface
Function
PSU/Ethernet
20 to 32 VDC, 2A
PSU part numbers
Table 30 PSU part numbers for PMP 450b SM
Cambium description
Cambium part number
Gigabit Enet Capable Power Supply - 20 - 32VDC, 15W
N000900L001C
Page 2-25
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Power supply – PMP/PTP 450 Series
The PMP/PTP 450 Series support powering from the following powering sources:

Gigabit Enet Capable Power Supply – 30 VDC, 15W

CMM4 with external 29 V power supply
Warning
The PMP 450 Ruggedized High Gain Integrated Subscriber Module (Cambium part numbers
C035045C014A and C036045C014A), while encapsulated in a 450i-type enclosure, contains
450 circuitry which must be powered via 30VDC. Powering these SMs with a 56 VDC will
damage the device.
PSU part numbers
Table 31 PSU part numbers for PMP/PTP 450 Series
Cambium description
Cambium part number
Gigabit Enet Capable Power Supply - 30VDC, 15W
N000900L001C
Cable, UL Power Supply Cord Set, US
N000900L007A
Cable, UL Power Supply Cord Set, EU
N000900L008A
Cable, UL Power Supply Cord Set, UK
N000900L009A
Cable, UL Power Supply Cord Set, Brazil
N000900L010A
Gigabit Enet Capable Power Supply
The Gigabit Enet Capable power supply interfaces are described in Table 32. This power supply requires
procurement of an AC line cord that connects the outlet of the same (using IEC-60320 Type 5 connector).
A list of available power supply cord options from Cambium Networks are given in Table 31.
Table 32 –Gigabit Enet Capable power supply
Interface
Function
AC Input
90-264 VAC, 0.5A rms @120VAC/ 0.25A rms @240VAC, 47 to 63 Hz
DC Output
30.0 Vdc +/-5%, 15W, 500 mA max
RJ 45 Sockets
Two (Data In and Data & Power Out)
LEDs
Green, :LED Intensity determined by Level 5 efficiency
Page 2-26
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Figure 16 Gigabit Enet Capable power supply
Page 2-27
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
ODU mounting brackets & accessories
The list of supported brackets is provided in Table 33.

The "Tilt bracket assembly" is the recommended bracket for the AP, SM or BH integrated units.

The "Mounting Bracket (Connectorized)" can be used where a low profile and ease of assembly of
Connectorized AP, SM or BH is required.

The "Mounting Bracket (Integrated)" provide a wider range of adjustment for AP, SM and BH
integrated devices.
Table 33 Accessories part numbers
Cambium description
Cambium part number
Mounting brackets
Tilt Bracket Assembly
N000045L002A
Mounting Bracket (Integrated)
N000065L031A
Mounting Bracket (Connectorized)
N000065L032A
Miscellaneous
Ethernet cable adapter for CMM4 (Dongle)
N000045L001A
RJ-45 Gland Spare – PG16 style (QTY 10)
N000065L033A
Blanking Plug Pack (Qty 10)
N000065L036A
Lightning protection
The 450 Platform Family supports the lightning protection units listed in Table 34.
The LPU offers the highest level of protection and is the recommended device. Where low cost
deployment is essential, for example for SM in residential application, the Gigabit Surge Suppressor may
be used instead.
Table 34 Lightning protection part numbers
Cambium description
Cambium part number
450 Series (Including 450b and 450d)
600SSH
Surge Suppressor (30 VDC)
450i and 450m Series
LPU and Grounding Kit (1 kit per ODU)
C000065L007A
Gigabit Surge Suppressor (56 VDC)
C000000L033A
Page 2-28
Chapter 2: System hardware
ODU interfaces
ODU interfaces
PMP 450m Series AP
These interfaces are described in Table 36.
Figure 17 PMP 450m Series - AP rear interfaces
Ground Lug
LED
Aux
SFP
PSU (Main)
Ground Lug
Table 35 PMP 450m Series – AP rear interfaces
Port name
Connector
Interface
Description
PSU (Main)
RJ45
PoE input
Power over Ethernet (PoE).
10/100/1000 BaseT Ethernet
Data
10/100 BaseT Ethernet
Data
PoE output
Standard IEEE802.3at PoE.
Sync input/output
Connection and powering of UGPS
Aux
RJ45
Sync input
SFP
Ground Lugs
RJ45
1000 BaseX Ethernet (LX or
SX)
Data
10 AWG copper wire
For grounding the unit
Page 2-29
Chapter 2: System hardware
ODU interfaces
PMP/PTP 450i
The Ethernet and Sync/AUX ports are on the rear of the integrated and connectorized ODUs (Figure 18).
These interfaces are described in Table 36.
Figure 18 PMP/PTP 450i Series - ODU rear interfaces
LED
Ground Lug
Ground Lug
Aux
Main
RF port A
RF port B
Table 36 PMP/PTP 450i Series – ODU rear interfaces
Port name
Connector
Interface
Description
Main PSU
RJ45
PoE input
Power over Ethernet (PoE).
10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet
Data
10/100/100BASE-T Ethernet
Data (see Note below)
PoE output
Standard IEEE802.3at PoE.
Sync input/output
Connection and powering of UGPS
Sync/AUX
RJ45
Sync input
The front of the connectorized ODU (Figure 19 PMP/PTP 450i Series – Connectorized ODU antenna
interfaces) provides N type female connectors for RF cable interfaces to antennas with ports A and B for
vertical and horizontal polarization respectively.
Page 2-30
Chapter 2: System hardware
ODU interfaces
Figure 19 PMP/PTP 450i Series – Connectorized ODU antenna interfaces
Page 2-31
Chapter 2: System hardware
ODU interfaces
PMP 450b
The Ethernet and AUX ports are on the rear of the integrated and connectorized ODUs (Figure 20).
These interfaces are described in Table 37.
Figure 20 PMP 450b Series - ODU rear interfaces
Table 37 PMP 450b Series – ODU rear interfaces
Port name
Connector
Interface
Description
PSU/Ethernet
Port
RJ45
PoE input
Power over Ethernet (PoE).
10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet
Data
Audio AUX
Port
Standard
Alignment tone input
3.5 mm audio jack for alignment tone
3.5 mm
headphones
Page 2-32
Chapter 2: System hardware
Cabling
Cabling
Ethernet standards and cable lengths
All configurations require a copper Ethernet connection from the ODU (Main PSU port) to the Power
supply.
Table 38 specifies, for each type of PSU and configuration, the maximum permitted PSU drop cable
length.
Table 38 PSU drop cable length restrictions
System configuration
Maximum cable length (m/ft)
Power supply
PoE powered device
on AUX/SYNC port
From power supply
to ODU
From ODU to PoE
device on AUX/SYNC
port
Power supply (30W)
None
100 m
N/A
IEEE 802.3at Type 2
Not supported
None
100 m
AC Power Injector (60W)
IEEE 802.3at Type 2
AC+DC enhanced Power
Injector
None
100 m in total
100 m
IEEE 802.3at Type 2
-48 V DC power injector
None
100 m
None
100 m
None
N/A
100 m in total
IEEE 802.3at Type 2
IEEE802.3at compliant
supply
N/A
100 m in total
IEEE 802.3at Type 2
CMM4 with 56 V supply
N/A
N/A
Not supported
100 m
IEEE 802.3at Type 2
N/A
Not supported
Note
The Ethernet connectivity for CMM4 requires the part “Ethernet cable adapter for CMM4 –
N000045L001A”.
Page 2-33
Chapter 2: System hardware
Cabling
Outdoor copper Cat5e Ethernet cable
Outdoor Cat5e cable is used for all connections that terminate outside the building. For example,
connections between the ODU, surge suppressors (if installed), UGPS receivers (if installed) and the
power supply injector. This is known as a “drop cable” (Figure 21).
The following practices are essential to the reliability and longevity of cabled connections:

Use only shielded cables and connectors to resist interference and corrosion.

For vertical runs, provide cable support and strain relief.

Include a 2 ft (0.6 m) service loop on each end of the cable to allow for thermal expansion and
contraction and to facilitate terminating the cable again when needed.

Include a drip loop to shed water so that most of the water does not reach the connector at the
device.

Properly crimp all connectors.

Use dielectric grease on all connectors to resist corrosion.
Order Superior Essex type BBDGe cable from Cambium Networks (Table 39). Other lengths of this cable
are available from Superior Essex.
Figure 21 Outdoor drop cable
Table 39 Drop cable part numbers
Cambium description
Cambium part number
1000 ft Reel Outdoor Copper Clad CAT5E
WB3175
328 ft (100 m) Reel Outdoor Copper Clad CAT5E
WB3176
Page 2-34
Chapter 2: System hardware
Cabling
SFP module kits
SFP module kits allow connection of a PMP 450 Series ODU to a network over an Optical Gigabit
Ethernet interface (1000BASE-LX or 1000BASE-SX) full-duplex mode.
Note
PMP 450m supports Fiber SFPs from system release 15.0.3.
Order SFP module kits from Cambium Networks (Table 40).
Table 40 SFP module kit part numbers
Cambium description
Cambium part number
Single Mode Optical SFP Interface per ODU
C000065L008
Multi-mode Optical SFP Interface per ODU
C000065L009
To compare the capabilities of the two optical SFP modules, refer to Table 41 and Table 42.
Table 41 Single Mode Optical SFP Interface per ODU (part number C000065L008)
Core/
cladding
(microns)
Mode
Bandwidth at
1310 nm (MHz/km)
Maximum
length of optical
interface
Insertion loss
(dB)
62.5/125
Multi
500
550 m (1800 ft)
1.67
50/125
Multi
400
550 m (1800 ft)
0.07
50/125
Multi
500
550 m (1800 ft)
1.19
10/125
Single
N/A
5000 m (16400 ft)
0.16
Table 42 Multi-mode Optical SFP Interface per ODU (part number C000065L009)
Core/
cladding
(microns)
Mode
Bandwidth at
850 nm (MHz/km)
Maximum
length of optical
interface
Insertion loss
(dB)
62.5/125
Multi
160
220 m (720 ft)
2.38
62.5/125
Multi
200
275 m (900 ft)
2.6
50/125
Multi
400
500 m (1640 ft)
3.37
50/125
Multi
500
550 m (1800 ft)
3.56
The upgrade kits contain the following components:

Optical SFP transceiver module (Figure 22)
Page 2-35
Chapter 2: System hardware
Cabling

Long EMC strain relief cable gland (Figure 23)

The Ethernet SFP Module Installation Guide

License key instructions and an entitlement key
Figure 22 Optical SFP transceiver module
Figure 23 Long cable gland
Page 2-36
Chapter 2: System hardware
Cabling
Main Ethernet port
The PoE cable pinout diagram for Main port is given below.
Table 43 Main port PoE cable pinout
RJ45 pin
Interface
Ethernet
description
+TxRx0
–TxRx0
+TxRx1
1000 BaseT
Ethernet with PoE
In
+Ve or -Ve
+Ve or –Ve
–TxRx1
+TxRx2
–TxRx2
+TxRx3
–TxRx3
PoE input
description
+Ve or –Ve
+Ve or –Ve
Note
The PoE input on the Main port accepts any polarity.
Aux port
Table 44 Aux port PoE cable pinout
RJ45 pin
Interface
100 BaseT
Ethernet with PoE
Out (see note
below)
+TxRx0
PoE output
description
-Ve
–TxRx0
+TxRx1
+Ve
–TxRx1
GPS power out, Alignment
tone out, GPS data out
Signal description
GPS and
alignment tone
GPS data in
GPS 0v
GPS Sync in
Page 2-37
N/A
Chapter 2: System hardware
Cabling
Note
PMP 450m Series - AP Aux port supports only alignment and sync functionalities in current
15.0/15.0.3 release.
Note
If the Aux port will be used, a second Ethernet gland will need to be ordered (Part Number:
N000065L033A).
Aux port to alignment tone headset wiring
A standard 32 ohms stereo headset can be connected to the AUX port to use the audio alignment tool.
The diagrams of the adapters for RJ45 and RJ12 are provided in Figure 24 and Figure 25 respectively.
The recommended values for both resistors are 220 ohm, 0.25W. Different resistor values can be used to
optimize the level of the audio signal depending on the headset characteristics and the level of ambient
noise.
Figure 24 Alignment Tone Cable
Resistors
#8
Pin 7
Left / tip
220 Ω
Right / ring
220 Ω
Pin 4
Sleeve /Common
Table 45 Aux port PoE cable pinout
RJ45 pin
(AUX port)
Signal description
Alignment tone out
GPS 0v
Serial component
Jack socket
(to jack plug of headset)
220 ohms resistor
Ring
220 ohm resistor
Tip
None
Sleeve
Figure 25 RJ12 Alignment Tone Cable
#8
Pin 5
Left / tip
Right / ring
Pin 6
Page 2-38
Chapter 2: System hardware
Cabling
Table 46 RJ12 Aux port PoE cable pinout
RJ12 pin (AUX
port)
Signal description
Jack socket
(to jack plug of headset)
Alignment tone out
Tip
Alignment tone out
Ring
Alternatively, a readymade headset adapter can be ordered from Best-Tronics (http://btpa.com/CambiumProducts/) with the following part number:
Table 47 Alignment tone adapter third party product details
Reference
Product description
BT-1277
Headset alignment cable (RJ-45) for the PMP/PTP 450i Series products
BT-0674
Headset alignment cable (RJ-12) for the PMP/PTP 450 Series products.
RJ45 connectors and spare glands
RJ45 connectors are required for plugging Cat5e cables into ODUs, LPUs, PSUs and other devices.
Order RJ45 connectors and crimp tool from Cambium Networks (Table 48).
The ODU is supplied with one environmental sealing gland for the drop cable. This gland is suitable for
cable diameters from 5 mm to 9 mm.
Figure 26 Cable gland (part number #N000065L033)
Table 48 RJ45 connector and spare gland part numbers
Cambium description
Cambium part number
Tyco/AMP, Mod Plug RJ45, 100 pack
WB3177
Tyco/AMP Crimp Tool
WB3211
RJ-45 Spare Grounding Gland - PG16 size (Qty. 10)
N000065L033
Page 2-39
Chapter 2: System hardware
Cabling
Page 2-40
Chapter 2: System hardware
Lightning protection unit (LPU) and grounding kit
Lightning protection unit (LPU) and
grounding kit
450i and 450m Series LPUs provide transient voltage surge suppression for ODU installations. Each
cable requires two LPUs, one near the ODU and the other near the linked device, usually at the building
entry point (Table 49).
Table 49 LPU and grounding kit contents
Lightning protection units (LPUs)
LPU grounding point nuts and washers
ODU to top LPU drop cable (600 mm)
EMC strain relief cable glands
U-bolts, nuts and washers for mounting LPUs
ODU to top LPU ground cable (M6-M6)
Bottom LPU ground cable (M6-M10)
ODU to ground cable (M6-M10
Page 2-41
Chapter 2: System hardware
Lightning protection unit (LPU) and grounding kit
One LPU and grounding kit (Table 49) is required for the PSU drop cable connection to the ODU. If the
ODU is to be connected to an auxiliary device, one additional LPU and grounding kit is required for the
Aux drop cable. Order the kits from Cambium Networks (Table 50).
Table 50 LPU and grounding kit part number
Cambium description
Cambium part number
Aux ports LPU and Grounding Kit (One Kit Per End)
C000065L007B
Cable grounding kit
Copper drop cable shields must be bonded to the grounding system in order to prevent lightning-strike
arcing (resulting in fire risk and damage to equipment).
One grounding kit (Figure 27) is required for each grounding point on the cable. Order cable grounding
kits from Cambium Networks (Table 51).
Caution
To provide adequate protection, all grounding cables must be a minimum size of 10 mm2
csa (8AWG), preferably 16 mm2 csa (6AWG), or 25 mm2 csa (4AWG).
Figure 27 Cable grounding kit
Table 51 Cable grounding kit part numbers
Cambium description
Cambium part number
Cable Grounding Kits For 1/4" And 3/8" Cable
01010419001
Page 2-42
Chapter 2: System hardware
Antennas and antenna cabling
Antennas and antenna cabling
Antenna requirements
Each connectorized ODU requires one external antenna (normally dual-polar).
For connectorized units operating in the USA or Canada 900 MHz, 4.9 GHz, 5.1 GHz, 5.2 GHz, 5.4 GHz
or 5.8 GHz bands, choose external antennas which are recommended by Cambium Networks. Do not
install any other antennas.
Supported external AP antennas
The recommended AP external antennas are listed in Table 52.
Table 52 List of AP external antennas
Cambium description
Cambium part number
900 MHz 13 dBi 65 degree Sector Antenna (Dual Slant)
N009045D001A
5 GHz Horizontal and Vertical Polarization Antenna for 90 Degree
Sector
85009324001
5 GHz Horizontal and Vertical Polarization Antenna for 60 Degree
Sector
85009325001
Note
LINKPlanner, Cambium Networks, planning tool, contains an up-to-date, exhaustive list of
antennas that can be used with Cambium Products.
Supported external BH/SM antenna
The recommended PTP 450i Series BH or PMP 450/450i Series SM external antenna is listed in Table
53.
Table 53 PTP 450i Series BH or PMP 450/450i Series SM external antenna
Cambium description
Cambium part number
900 MHz 12 dBi gain directional antenna (Dual Slant)
N009045D003A
Page 2-43
Chapter 2: System hardware
Antennas and antenna cabling
RF cable and connectors
RF cable of generic type LMR-400 is required for connecting the ODU to the antenna. N type male
connectors are required for connecting the RF cables to the connectorized ODU. Two connectors are
required per ODU. Use weatherproof connectors, preferably ones that are supplied with adhesive lined
heat shrink sleeves that are fitted over the interface between the cable and connector. Order CNT-400 RF
cable and N type male connectors from Cambium Networks (Table 54).
Table 54 RF cable and connector part numbers
Cambium description
Cambium part number
50 Ohm Braided Coaxial Cable - 75 meter
30010194001
50 Ohm Braided Coaxial Cable - 500 meter
30010195001
RF Connector, N, Male, Straight for CNT-400 Cable
09010091001
Antenna accessories
Connectorized ODUs require the following additional components:

Cable grounding kits: Order one cable grounding kit for each grounding point on the antenna cables.
Refer to Lightning protection unit (LPU) and grounding kit on 2-41

Self-amalgamating and PVC tape: Order these items to weatherproof the RF connectors

Lightning arrestors: When the connectorized ODU is mounted indoors, lightning arrestors (not LPUs)
are required for protecting the antenna RF cables at building entry. One arrestor is required per
antenna cable. One example of a compatible lightning arrestor is the Polyphaser LSXL-ME or LSXL
(not supplied by Cambium Networks).
Page 2-44
Chapter 2: System hardware
GPS synchronization
GPS synchronization
GPS synchronization description
Cambium offers GPS synchronization to limit the network’s own self-interference. The Cluster
Management CMM provides Global Positioning System (GPS) synchronization to the Access Point (AP)
and all associated Subscriber Modules (SM). Network operators have a choice of UGPS and CMM
solutions to select the option that works best for the environment.
Universal GPS (UGPS)
The UGPS provides network synchronization for smaller networks where a CMM may not be cost
effective. The UGPS provides synchronization for one or two modules so that even remote areas at the
edge of the network can operate with synchronization for improved performance. The UGPS works with
all Cambium PMP radios. The UGPS has a small footprint and is easy to deploy.
Figure 28 UGPS
Note
PMP 450/450i/450m Series - APs can power up a UGPS via the Aux/Timing port.
Page 2-45
Chapter 2: System hardware
GPS synchronization
CMM5
The CMM5 (Cluster Management Module) is the latest generation of solutions for the distribution of TDD
Sync signals and “Power-over-Ethernet (PoE)” in the field. The CMM5 is a modular design with individual
4-port power injectors and an optional controller used for remote management.
Key features of the CMM5 include:

Support for Gigabit Ethernet (1000BaseT)

Modular and scalable from 4 ports to 32 ports

Direct +/- 48VDC input (optional AC/DC power supplies are available from Cambium Networks)

Uses Cambium Networks UGPS for a synchronization source

Dual resilient power inputs

Rack mountable

Secure remote management when used with the optional CMM5 Controller Module

Support for PMP 450m (cnMedusa™)

Future support for integration into (cnMedusa™) for cloud or NOC-based management
It consists of four subsystems, described in the following sections:

CMM5 Controller Module

CMM5 Injector (29 volt and 56 volt versions)

Power supply(s) (240/600 watt)

UGPS
Cluster Management: Scenario 1
The following is a CMM5 Cluster Management scenario using four PMP 450i Access Points.
Table 55 CMM5 Cluster Management Scenario 1
Scenario
Equipment Needed
Features
Four PMP 450i Access Points
56 Volt Injector

Gigabit Ethernet

Local Management Interface

+/- 48VDC Input

Broad Device Support

Rack Mountable

48 VDC Available

No management or
resilience required
UGPS
Page 2-46
Chapter 2: System hardware
GPS synchronization
Figure 29 Cluster Management: Scenario 1
Cluster Management: Scenario 2
The following is a CMM5 Cluster Management scenario using four PMP 450i Access Points and four PMP
450 Access Points.
Table 56 CMM5 Cluster Management Scenario 2
Scenario
Equipment Needed
Features
Four PMP 450i Access Points

56 Volt Injector

Gigabit Ethernet support
Four PMP 450 Access Points

29 Volt Injector


1 CMM5 Controller
Local Management
Interface

One UGPS

+/- 48VDC Input

Broad Device Support

Rack Mountable
AC only environments
Two UGPS AC-to-48 VDC
Power Supplies
Resilent power sources
Management required
Secure, Remote Management
(https)
Resilence required.
Scalable to 32 devices
Page 2-47
Chapter 2: System hardware
GPS synchronization
Figure 30 Cluster Management: Scenario 2
CMM5 Controller Module
The major features of the CMM5 Controller Module are:

Auto-detect/control up to 8 Power Injectors

Monitor SYNC/Power/GPS status

Manage (up/down ports)

Web (HTTPS) and SNMPv2/v3 management (SNMP on roadmap)

1U/ half-width rack-mount
Figure 31 Controller Module
Page 2-48
Chapter 2: System hardware
GPS synchronization
CMM5 Injector Module
The CMM5 Injector Module has the following features:

Stand-alone mode or used with controller for mgmt.

+/- 48VDC input with green/amber LED’s for status

Injects SYNC pulse from UGPS

2U / half-width rack-mount
Note
There are two different versions of the injector module (56V and 29V). You must select the
correct injector for the types of radios that you will be powering. In both cases, the injectors
use the same input power supplies or can be powered with +/- 48VDC. The output power is
different and the type of SYNC signal used is different between the two types of injectors.
Systems can have 29V and 56V injectors deployed alongside each other.
Figure 32 Injector Module
CMM5 Injector Compatibility Matrix
The following table provides the Injector compatibility matrix.
Table 57 Injector Compatibility Matrix
Product
Power/Injector Module
Sync
PMP 450m
Yes/56V
Yes
PMP/PTP 450i
Yes/56V
Yes
PMP 450b
Yes/29V
Yes
PMP 450/PTP 450
Yes/29V
Yes
PMP 100/PTP 100
Yes/29V
Yes
Page 2-49
Chapter 2: System hardware
GPS synchronization
CMM5 Specifications
The following table provides specifications for the CMM5 Power & Sync Injector (56 Volts).
Table 58 CMM5 Specifications
CMM5 Power and Sync Injector 56 Volts
Model Number
C000000L556A
Data Interface
4 each RJ45 Gigabit Powered output ports “To
Radios”
4 each RJ45 Gigabit Data input ports “To Switch
Array”
1 each GPS timing port (RJ-12)
1 each CMM5 USB Serial port for local
administration
1 each RJ12 Daisy Chain port “IN”
1 each RJ12 Daisy Chain port “OUT”
Surge Suppresion
Lightning Suppression for each “To Radios”
RJ45 Port
Power
Input Voltage: + or - 48 VDC
Input Power Consumption: 400 watts
Output Voltage: + or - 55 VDC
Output Current: 0 - 1.8A per channel
Output Power: 0 - 90 Watts per channel
Cabinet Temperature
-40° C to +55°C (-40° F to +131° F), 90%
humidity, condensing
Physical
Max Distance from Managed Radios: 328 cable
feet (100m)
Max Distance to GPS Antenna: 100 cable feet
(30.5m)
Dimensions
8.85” W x 15.75” D x 1.65” H (225mm x 400mm
x 42mm)
Unit Weight
6.6 pounds (3kg)
Power Interface
Terminals
2 Power input ports for 48 VDC Power (Power
supplies sold separately)
Page 2-50
Chapter 2: System hardware
GPS synchronization
CMM4 (Rack Mount)
The Cluster Management Module (CMM) is the heart of the Cambium system’s synchronization
capability, which allows network operators to reuse frequencies and add capacity while ensuring
consistency in the quality of service to customers.
For operators who prefer indoor CMM mounting, Cambium offers the Rack-Mounted Cluster Management
Module 4. The unit is designed to be mounted onto a standard 19-inch telecommunications rack and to
allow the Cambium CMM4 to be co-located with other telecommunications equipment.
Figure 33 CMM4 (Rack Mount)
The CMM4 has two DC power inputs, one 29 V and one 56V. It can be used to power and synchronize
both 29 V legacy products such as the PMP 450 Series and 56V products such as the PMP 450i Series
simultaneously.
If the 29 V legacy products are connected to the CMM4, a 29 V power supply needs to be connected.
If the 450i Series is connected to the CMM4, a 56 V power supply needs to be connected. The CMM4
supports having two of the 56 V and two of the 29 V supplies for redundancy.
Warning
PMP 450i Series requires different wiring between the CMM4 and device. If a PMP450
Series ODU is replaced by a PMP 450i Series and the existing drop cable needs to be reused, the Ethernet cable adapter for CMM4 - N000045L001A" must be used between the
CMM4 and the existing drop cable.
Page 2-51
Chapter 2: System hardware
GPS synchronization
Figure 34 CMM4 56 V power adapter (dongle)
CMM4 56 V power adapter cable pinout
Figure 35 CMM4 power adapter cabling diagram
J1
J2
Shield
RJ45 Jack
RJ45 Plug
Page 2-52
Chapter 2: System hardware
GPS synchronization
Table 59 CMM4 power adapter cable pinout
Plug J1 pin
Jack J2 pin
Screen
Screen
Note
Pins 5 and 7 are wired in a cross-over configuration.
Page 2-53
Chapter 2: System hardware
GPS synchronization
CMM4 (Cabinet with switch)
Designed to deliver consistent and reliable wireless broadband service, the PMP/PTP system gracefully
scales to support large deployments. The cluster management module is the heart of the system’s
synchronization capability which allows network operators to re-use frequencies and add capacity while
ensuring consistency in the quality of service to customers. As a result, subscribers can experience
carrier-grade service even at the outer edge of the network.
Figure 36 CMM4 (Cabinet with switch)
CMM4 (Cabinet without switch)
This CMM includes all of the functionality listed above but there is no switch. This provides the network
operator the flexibility to use the switch of their choice with the power and synchronization capabilities of
the CMM4.
Page 2-54
Chapter 2: System hardware
GPS synchronization
CMM3/CMMmicro
The CMM3 or CMMmicro (Cluster Management Module micro) provides power, GPS timing, and
networking connections for an AP cluster. The CMM3 is configurable through a web interface.
The CMM3 contains an 8-port managed switch that supports Power over Ethernet (PoE – this is
Cambium PoE, not the standard PoE) on each port and connects any combination of APs, BHMs, BHSs,
or Ethernet feed. The Cambium fixed wireless broadband IP networks PoE differs from IEEE Standard
803.3af PoE, and the two should not be intermixed. The CMM3 can auto-negotiate speed to match inputs
that are either 100Base-TX or 10Base-T, and either full duplex or half duplex, where the connected
device is set to auto-negotiate. Alternatively, these parameters are settable.
A CMM3 requires only one cable, terminating in an RJ-45 connector, for each connected module to
distribute

Ethernet signaling.

power to as many as 8 co-located modules—APs, BHMs, or BHSs. Through a browser interface to
the managed switch, ports can be powered or not.

sync to APs and BHMs. The CMM3 receives 1-pulse per second timing information from Global
Positioning System (GPS) satellites through an antenna (included) and passes the timing pulse
embedded in the 24-V power to the connected modules.
GPS status information is available at the CMM3, however

CMM3 provides time and date information to BHMs and APs if both the CMMmicro is operating on
CMMmicro Release 2.1 or later and the AP/BHM is operating on System Release 4.2 or later. See
Configuring time settings on Page 7-17.

CMM3 does not provide time and date information to BHMs and APs if either the CMM3 is operating
on a release earlier than CMMmicro Release 2.1 or the AP/BHM is operating on a release earlier than
System Release 4.2.
A CMM3/CMMicro is shown in Figure 37 and Figure 38.
Page 2-55
Chapter 2: System hardware
Figure 37 CMM3
GPS synchronization
Figure 38 Pole mounted CMM3
Note
A CMM3 cannot be used to power up a 450i or 450m Series ODUs.
Page 2-56
Chapter 2: System hardware
Installing a GPS receiver
Installing a GPS receiver
To install a GPS receiver as the timing reference source, use the following procedures:

Mounting the GPS receiver on page 2-58

Cabling the GPS Antenna on page 2-59

Installing and connecting the GPS LPU on page 2-59
Caution
Prior to power-up of equipment, ensure that all cables are connected to the correct
interfaces of the CMM4 unit and the UGPS receiver module. Failure to do so may result in
damage to the equipment.
GPS receiver location
Mount the GPS receiver at a location that meets the following requirements:

It must be possible to protect the installation as described in Grounding and lightning protection on
page 3-8.

It must have an un-interrupted view of at least half of the southern (resp. northern) sky in the northern
(resp. southern) hemisphere. For a receiver mounted on a wall there must be no other significant
obstructions in the view of the sky.

It must be mounted at least 1 m (3 ft), preferably 2 m (6 ft), away from other GPS receiving
equipment.

It must not be sited in the field of radiation of co-located radio communications equipment and should
be positioned at a distance of at least 3 m (10 ft) away.
Mount the UGPS receiver on the wall of the equipment building if there is a suitable location on the wall
that can meet these requirements.
Caution
The GPS receiver is not approved for operation in locations where gas hazards exist, as
defined by HAZLOC (USA) and ATEX (Europe).
Mounting the GPS receiver module on the equipment
building
If mounting the GPS receiver on the equipment building (Figure 43), select a position on the wall that
meets the following requirements:

It must be below the roof height of the equipment building or below the height of any roof-mounted
equipment (such as air conditioning plant).

It must be below the lightning air terminals.
Page 2-57
Chapter 2: System hardware

Installing a GPS receiver
It must not project more than 600mm (24 inches) from the wall of the building.
If these requirements cannot all be met, then the module must be mounted on a metal tower or mast.
Mounting the GPS receiver module on a metal tower or mast
If mounting the GPS receiver module on a metal tower or mast (Figure 44), select a position that meets
the following requirements:

It must not be mounted any higher than is necessary to receive an adequate signal from four GPS
satellites.

It must be protected by a nearby lightning air terminal that projects farther out from the tower than the
GPS receiver module.
Mounting the GPS receiver
Mount the UGPS receiver (following manufacturer’s instructions) upon either an external wall (Figure 43)
or a metal tower or mast (Figure 44).
Figure 39 GPS antenna mounting
Page 2-58
Chapter 2: System hardware
Installing a GPS receiver
Procedure 1 Mounting the GPS receiver
Ensure that the mounting position

has an unobstructed view of the sky to 20º above the horizon.

is not the highest object at the site. (The GPS antenna does not need to be particularly
high on a site, which would give it more exposure to lightning. It just needs to have an
unobstructed view of the sky.)

is not further than 100 feet (30.4 meters) of cable from the CMM.
Select a pole that has an outside diameter of 1.25 to 1.5 inches (3 to 4 cm) to which the
GPS antenna bracket can be mounted.
Place the U-bolts (provided) around the pole as shown in Figure 28.
Slide the GPS antenna bracket onto the U-bolts.
Slide the ring washers (provided) onto the U-bolts.
Slide the lock washers (provided) onto the U-bolts.
Use the nuts (provided) to securely fasten the bracket to the U-bolts.
Please refer to the PMP Synchronization Solutions User Guide located on the Cambium website
(http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/resources/pmp-synchronization-solutions ).
Cabling the GPS Antenna
Connect the GPS coax cable to the female N-connector on the GPS antenna. Please refer to the PMP
Synchronization Solutions User Guide located on the Cambium website
(http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/resources/pmp-synchronization-solutions ).
Installing and connecting the GPS LPU
Install and ground the GPS drop cable LPU at the building (or cabinet) entry point, as described in Install
the bottom LPU on page 6-21.
Page 2-59
Chapter 2: System hardware
Ordering the components
Ordering the components
This section describes how to select components for 450m Series, 450i Series and 450 Series Greenfield
network or 450m/450i Series network migration. It specifies Cambium part numbers for 450 Platform
Family components.
Order PMP 450m Series, PMP/PTP 450i Series and PMP/PTP 450 Series ODUs from Cambium
Networks.
PMP 450m
Table 60 PMP 450m Series ODU part numbers
Cambium description
Cambium part number
PMP 450m AP (Access Point)
5 GHz PMP 450m Integrated Access Point, 90 Degree (ROW)
C050045A101A
5 GHz PMP 450m Integrated Access Point, 90 Degree (FCC)
C050045A102A
5 GHz PMP 450m Integrated Access Point, 90 Degree (EU)
C050045A103A
5 GHz PMP 450m Integrated Access Point, 90 Degree (DES Only)
C050045A104A
5 GHz PMP 450m Integrated Access Point, 90 Degree (IC)
C050045A105A
PMP 450i
Table 61 PMP 450i Series ODU part numbers
Cambium description
Cambium part number
PMP 450i AP (Access Point)
900 MHz PMP 450i Connectorized Access Point
C009045A001A
3 GHz PMP 450i Connectorized Access Point
C030045A001A
3 GHz PMP 450i Integrated Access Point, 90 Degree
C030045A002A
3 GHz PMP 450i Connectorized Access Point, DES Only
C030045A003A
3 GHz PMP 450i Integrated Access Point, 90 Degree, DES Only
C030045A004A
5 GHz PMP 450i Connectorized Access Point (RoW)
C050045A001A
5 GHz PMP 450i Connectorized Access Point (FCC)
C050045A002A
5 GHz PMP 450i Connectorized Access Point (EU)
C050045A003A
5 GHz PMP 450i Connectorized Access Point (DES Only)
C050045A004A
Page 2-60
Chapter 2: System hardware
Ordering the components
Cambium description
Cambium part number
5 GHz PMP 450i Connectorized Access Point (IC)
C050045A015A
5 GHz PMP 450i AP, Integrated 90°sector antenna (RoW)
C050045A005A
5 GHz PMP 450i AP, Integrated 90°sector antenna (FCC)
C050045A006A
5 GHz PMP 450i Integrated Access Point, 90 degree (EU)
C050045A007A
5 GHz PMP 450i AP, Integrated 90°sector antenna (DES only)
C050045A008A
5 GHz PMP 450i AP, Integrated 90°sector antenna (IC)
C050045A016A
PMP 450i SM (Subscriber Module)
3 GHz PMP 450i Connectorized Subscriber Module
C030045C001A
3 GHz PMP 450i SM, Integrated High Gain Antenna
C030045C002A
5 GHz PMP 450i Connectorized Subscriber Module
C050045C001A
5 GHz PMP 450i SM, Integrated High Gain Antenna
C050045C002A
Note
The 450i SM does not have license keys.
Table 62 PMP 450i ATEX/HAZLOC ODU models/part numbers
ODU model /
part number
Description
ODU model
5085CHH
450i Connectorized ATEX/HAZLOC
5085HH
450i Integrated 90 Deg Sector ATEX/HAZLOC
5095HH
450i Integrated High Gain Directional ATEX/HAZLOC
Part Number
C050045A009A
5 GHz PMP 450i Conn Access Point (ROW), ATEX/HAZLOC
C050045A010A
5 GHz PMP 450i Conn Access Point (FCC), ATEX/HAZLOC
C050045A011A
5 GHz PMP 450i Conn Access Point (EU), ATEX/HAZLOC
C050045A012A
5 GHz PMP 450i Integrated Access Point, 90 degree (ROW), ATEX/HAZLOC
C050045A013A
5 GHz PMP 450i Integrated Access Point, 90 degree (FCC), ATEX/HAZLOC
C050045A014A
5 GHz PMP 450i Integrated Access Point, 90 degree (EU), ATEX/HAZLOC
C050045A017A
5 GHz PMP 450i Conn Access Point (IC), ATEX/HAZLOC
Page 2-61
Chapter 2: System hardware
Ordering the components
C050045A018A
5 GHz PMP 450i Integrated Access Point, 90 degree (IC), ATEX/HAZLOC
C050045A019A
5 GHz PMP 450i Conn Access Point (DES Only), ATEX/HAZLOC
C050045A020A
5 GHz PMP 450i Integrated Access Point, 90 degree (DES Only), ATEX/HAZLOC
C050045C003A
5 GHz PMP 450i Conn Subscriber Module, ATEX/HAZLOC
C050045C004A
5 GHz PMP 450i Integrated High Gain Antenna, ATEX/HAZLOC
PTP 450i
Table 63 PTP 450i Series ODU part numbers
Cambium description
Cambium part number
3 GHz PTP 450i END, Connectorized
C030045B001A
3 GHz PTP 450i END, Integrated High Gain Antenna
C030045B002A
3 GHz PTP 450i END, Connectorized (DES only)
C030045B003A
3 GHz PTP 450i END, Integrated Access Point, 90 degree (DES only)
C035045B004A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Connectorized (RoW)
C050045B001A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Connectorized (FCC)
C050045B003A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Connectorized (EU)
C050045B005A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Connectorized (DES only)
C050045B007A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Connectorized (IC)
C050045B015A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Integrated High Gain Antenna (RoW)
C050045B002A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Integrated High Gain Antenna (FCC)
C050045B004A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Integrated High Gain Antenna (EU)
C050045B006A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Integrated High Gain Antenna (DES only)
C050045B008A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Integrated High Gain Antenna (IC)
C050045B016A
Ethernet cable adapter for CMM4
N000045L001A
Page 2-62
Chapter 2: System hardware
Ordering the components
Table 64 PTP 450i ATEX/HAZLOC ODU models/part numbers
ODU model /
part number
Description
ODU model
5085CHH
450i Connectorized ATEX/HAZLOC
5085HH
450i Integrated 90 Deg Sector ATEX/HAZLOC
5095HH
450i Integrated High Gain Directional ATEX/HAZLOC
C050045B009A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Connectorized (ROW), ATEX/HAZLOC
C050045B010A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Integrated High Gain Antenna (ROW), ATEX/HAZLOC
C050045B011A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Connectorized (FCC), ATEX/HAZLOC
C050045B012A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Integrated High Gain Antenna (FCC), ATEX/HAZLOC
C050045B013A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Connectorized (EU), ATEX/HAZLOC
C050045B014A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Integrated High Gain Antenna (EU), ATEX/HAZLOC
C050045B017A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Connectorized (IC), ATEX/HAZLOC
C050045B018A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Integrated High Gain Antenna (IC), ATEX/HAZLOC
C050045B019A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Connectorized (DES Only), ATEX/HAZLOC
C050045B020A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Integrated High Gain Antenna (DES Only), ATEX/HAZLOC
PMP 450b
Table 65 PMP 450b Series ODU part numbers
Cambium description
Cambium part number
PMP 450b SM (Subscriber Module)
5 GHz 450b Mid Gain WB SM
C050045C011A
Page 2-63
Chapter 2: System hardware
Ordering the components
PMP 450
Table 66 PMP 450 Series ODU part numbers
Cambium description
Cambium part number
PMP 450 AP (Access Point)
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point
C024045A001A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point (DES)
C024045A003A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point
C035045A001A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point (DES)
C035045A003A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point
C036045A001A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point (DES)
C036045A003A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point
C054045A001A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point (US only)
C054045A002A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point (DES)
C054045A003A
PMP 450 AP Lite
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point - Lite
C024045A011A
3.3-3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point - Lite
C035045A011A
3.55-3.8 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point - Lite
C036045A011A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point - Lite
C054045A011A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point (FCC) - Lite
C054045A012A
PMP 450 SM (Subscriber Module)
900 MHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module
C009045C001A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C024045C001A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C024045C002A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C024045C003A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, Uncapped
C024045C004A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C024045C005A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C024045C006A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C024045C007A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, Uncapped
C024045C008A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 High Gain Directional Integrated Subscriber
C035045C014A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C035045C001A
Page 2-64
Chapter 2: System hardware
Ordering the components
Cambium description
Cambium part number
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C035045C002A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C035045C003A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, Uncapped
C035045C004A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C035045C005A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C035045C006A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C035045C007A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, Uncapped
C035045C008A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 High Gain Directional Integrated Subscriber
C036045C014A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C036045C001A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C036045C002A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C036045C003A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, Uncapped
C036045C004A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C036045C005A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C036045C006A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C036045C007A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, Uncapped
C036045C008A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C054045C005A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C054045C006A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C054045C007A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, Uncapped
C054045C008A
5 GHz PMP 450 Integrated Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C054045C001B
5 GHz PMP 450 Integrated Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C054045C002B
5 GHz PMP 450 Integrated Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C054045C003B
5 GHz PMP 450 Integrated Subscriber Module, Uncapped
C054045C004B
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C054045C005B
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C054045C006B
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C054045C007B
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, Uncapped
C054045C008B
5 GHz PMP 450d Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps – 4-pack
C054045H013B
5 GHz PMP 450d Subscriber Module, Uncapped – 4-pack
C054045H014B
Page 2-65
Chapter 2: System hardware
Ordering the components
PTP 450
Table 67 PTP 450 Series ODU part numbers
Cambium description
Cambium part number
PTP 450 900 MHz END – Connectorized
C009045B001A
PTP 450 3.5 GHz END – Integrated
C035045B001A
PTP 450 3.5 GHz END – Connectorized
C035045B002A
PTP 450 3.5 GHz END – Integrated – DES Only
C035045B003A
PTP 450 3.5 GHz END – Connectorized – DES Only
C035045B004A
PTP 450 3.65 GHz END – Integrated
C036045B001A
PTP 450 3.65 GHz END – Connectorized
C036045B002A
PTP 450 3.65 GHz END – Integrated – DES Only
C036045B003A
PTP 450 3.65 GHz END – Connectorized – DES Only
C036045B004A
PTP 450 5 GHz END – Integrated (ROW)
C054045B001A
PTP 450 5 GHz END – Connectorized (ROW)
C054045B002A
PTP 450 5 GHz END – Integrated (ROW) – DES Only
C054045B003A
PTP 450 5 GHz END – Connectorized (ROW) – DES Only
C054045B004A
PTP 450 5 GHz END – Integrated (FCC)
C054045B005A
PTP 450 5 GHz END – Connectorized (FCC)
C054045B006A
PMP/PTP 450/450i Series Accessories
Table 68 PMP/PTP 450/450I Series Accessories
Cambium description
Cambium part number
PMP 450 AP Antenna Options
900 MHz 65 degree Sector Antenna (Dual Slant)
N009045D001A
900 MHz 12 dBi gain directional antenna (Dual Slant)
N009045D003A
2.4 GHz Dual Slant Antenna for 60 Degree Sector
C024045D601A
3.5 GHz and 3.6 GHz Dual Slant Antenna for 90 Degree Sector
C030045D901A
5 GHz Antenna for 60 Degree Sector
85009325001
5 GHz Antenna for 90 Degree Sector
85009324001
N-type to N-type cable (16 inch length)
30009406002
Page 2-66
Chapter 2: System hardware
Ordering the components
Cambium description
Cambium part number
Power supplies
Power supply, 60 W, 56 V with Gbps support
N000065L001B
AC+DC Enhanced Power Injector
C000065L002C
Line Cord, Fig 8 – US
N000065L003A
Line Cord, Fig 8 – UK
N000065L004A
Line Cord, Fig 8 – EU
N000065L005A
Power over Ethernet midspan, 60 W, -48 VDC Input
N000000L036A
Power Supply, 30 W, 56 V – Gbps support
N000000L034A
Gigabit Enet Capable Power Supply - 30VDC, 15W
N000900L001A
Cable, UL Power Supply Cord Set, US
N000900L007A
Cable, UL Power Supply Cord Set, EU
N000900L008A
Cable, UL Power Supply Cord Set, UK
N000900L009A
AP Optional Equipment
CMM MICRO (Outdoor Enclosure) (450 only)
1070CKHH
CMM5 Controller
C000000L500A
CMM5 Power and Sync Injector 56V
C000000L556A
UGPS
1096H
CMM5 Power Supply, AC, 56V 240W
N000000L054B
CMM5 Power Supply AC, 48V, 640W
N000000L101A
CMM5 Spare Controller Cable – 1m
N000000L102A
CMM5 to UGPS Shielded Cable (20 meter)
N000000L103A
CMM5 Spare DC Power Connector (10 pack)
N000000L104A
CMM4 W/RUGGEDIZED Switch and GPS
1090CKHH
CMM4 NO Switch
1091HH
CMM4 Rack Mount Assembly
1092HH
Ethernet cable adapter for CMM4
N000045L001A
Universal GPS Module
1096H
RJ-45 Gland Spare – PG16 style (QTY 10)
N000065L033A
Blanking Plug Pack (Qty 10)
N000065L036A
SM Optional Equipment
Page 2-67
Chapter 2: System hardware
Ordering the components
Cambium description
Cambium part number
Power Supply, 30 W, 56 V – Gbps support
N000000L034A
Gigabit Enet Capable Power Supply – 30 VDC, 15 W
N000900L001A
Cable, UL Power Supply Cord Set, US
N000900L007A
Cable, UL Power Supply Cord Set, EU
N000900L008A
Cable, UL Power Supply Cord Set, UK
N000900L009A
53CM Offset, Reflector Dish Kit, 4PK
HK2022A
Alignment Tool Headset
ACATHS-01A
Accessories
Surge Suppressor (30 VDC)
600SSH
Gigabit Surge Suppressor (56 VDC)
C000000L033A
LPU and Grounding Kit (1 kit per ODU)
C000065L007B
Single Mode Optical SFP Interface per ODU
C000065L008A
Multimode Kit
C000065L009A
50 Ohm Braided Coaxial Cable - 75 meter
30010194001
50 Ohm Braided Coaxial Cable - 500 meter
30010195001
RF Connector, N, Male, Straight for CNT-400 Cable
09010091001
Tyco/AMP, Mod Plug RJ45, 100 pack
WB3177
Tyco/AMP Crimp Tool
WB3211
RJ-45 Spare Grounding Gland - PG16 size (Qty. 10)
N000065L033
Mounting brackets
Tilt Bracket Assembly
N000045L002A
Mounting Bracket (Integrated)
N000065L031A
Mounting Bracket (Connectorized)
N000065L032A
Upgrade Keys
PMP 450 4 To 10 Mbps Upgrade Key
C000045K002A
PMP 450 4 To 20 Mbps Upgrade Key
C000045K003A
PMP 450 4 To Uncapped Upgrade Key
C000045K004A
PMP 450 10 To 20 Mbps Upgrade Key
C000045K005A
PMP 450 10 To Uncapped MBPS Upgrade Key
C000045K006A
PMP 450 20 To Uncapped MBPS Upgrade Key
C000045K007A
Page 2-68
Chapter 2: System hardware
Ordering the components
Cambium description
Cambium part number
PMP 450 Lite AP to Full AP Upgrade Key
C000045K008A
Extended Warranty
PMP 450 Platform AP Extended Warranty, 1 Additional Year
SG00TS4009A
PMP 450 Platform AP Extended Warranty, 2 Additional Years
SG00TS4017A
PMP 450 Platform AP Extended Warranty, 4 Additional Years
SG00TS4025A
PMP 450 Platform SM Extended Warranty, 1 Additional Year
SG00TS4010A
PMP 450 Platform SM Extended Warranty, 2 Additional Years
SG00TS4018A
PMP 450 Platform SM Extended Warranty, 4 Additional Years
SG00TS4026A
Page 2-69
Chapter 3:
System planning
This chapter provides information to help the user to plan a PMP/PTP 450 Platform link.
The following topics are described in this chapter:

Typical deployment on page 3-2 contains diagrams illustrating typical PMP/PTP 450 Platform site
deployments.

Site planning on page 3-7 describes factors to be considered when planning the proposed link end
sites, including grounding, lightning protection and equipment location.

Radio Frequency planning on page 3-17 describes how to plan PMP/PTP 450 Platform links to
conform to the regulatory restrictions that apply in the country of operation.

Link planning on page 3-28 describes factors to be taken into account when planning links, such as
range, path loss and throughput.

Planning for connectorized units on page 3-31 describes factors to be taken into account when
planning to use connectorized ODUs with external antennas in PMP/PTP 450 Platform links.

Data network planning on page 3-33 describes factors to be considered when planning PMP/PTP 450
Platform data networks.

Network management planning on page 3-41 describes how to plan for PMP/PTP 450 Platform links
to be managed remotely using SNMP.

Security planning on page 3-42 describes how to plan for PMP/PTP 450 Platform links to operate in
secure mode.

Remote AP Deployment on page 3-52 describes how to deploy Remote AP.
Page 3-1
Chapter 3: System planning
Typical deployment
Typical deployment
This section contains diagrams illustrating typical PMP/PTP 450 Platform site deployments.
ODU with PoE interface to PSU
In the basic configuration, there is only one Ethernet interface, a copper cable for power over Ethernet
(POE) from the PSU to the ODU (PSU port), as shown in the following diagrams: mast or tower
installation (Figure 40 ), wall installation (Figure 41) and roof installation (Figure 42).
Figure 40 Mast or tower installation
Pow er over Ethernet CAT5e cable (gel-filled,
shielded w ith copper-plat ed steel)
ODU
Netw or k CA T5e cable
ODU grou nd cables
Site gro unding sy stem
First point o f co ntact
betw een drop cable
an d t ow er
Intermediat e
grou nd cable(s)
as req uir ed
Equipm ent building
or cabinet
Bott om LPU
PSU
AC
supply
Netw or k
eq uip ment
Build ing
en try
Tow er ground bar
Gr ound ring
Page 3-2
Chapter 3: System planning
Typical deployment
Figure 41 Wall installation
Pow er over Ethernet CAT5e cable (gelfilled, shielded w ith copper-plat ed steel)
Netw or k Cat5e cable
ODU grou nd cables
Site gro unding sy stem
ODU
First point o f co ntact
betw een drop cable
an d w all
Bott om LPU
PSU
A C supply
Netw or k
eq uip ment
Build ing entry
Gr ound ring
Page 3-3
Chapter 3: System planning
Typical deployment
Figure 42 Roof installation
Pow er over Ethernet CAT5e cable
(gel-filled, shielded w ith copperplat ed steel)
Air t erm inals (finials)
Netw or k CA T5e cable
ODU
ODU grou nd cables
Site gro unding sy stem
Build ing entry point
Tow er ground ing
conducto r
Drop cable inside b uilding
Equipm ent room
Bott om LPU
PSU
AC
supply
Netw or k
eq uip ment
Equipm ent room entr y point
Build ing gr ound ring
Page 3-4
AC
serv ice
Chapter 3: System planning
Typical deployment
Figure 43 GPS receiver wall installation
Pow er over Ethernet
CAT5e cable (gel-filled,
shielded w ith copperplated steel)
Netw ork Cat5e cable
Drop cable to top
LPU and ODU
ODU/ GPS Ground
cables
Site grounding system
GPS receiver
First point of contact
betw een drop cable
and w all
CM M 4
Netw ork
equipm ent
Ground ring
Page 3-5
Chapter 3: System planning
Typical deployment
Figure 44 GPS receiver tower or mast installation
Page 3-6
Chapter 3: System planning
Site planning
Site planning
This section describes factors to be considered when choosing sites for PMP or PTP radios, power
supplies, CMM4 (if applicable) and UGPS (if applicable).
Site selection for PMP/PTP radios
When selecting a site for the ODU, consider the following factors:

Height and location to ensure that people are kept away from the antenna; see Calculated distances
and power compliance margins on page 4-24.

Height and location to achieve the best radio path.

Indoor location where the power supply LED indicators will be visible, so the drop cable length will not
exceed the maximum recommended length; see Power supply site selection on page 3-8.

Ability to meet the requirements specified in Grounding and lightning protection on page 3-8.

Aesthetics and planning permission issues.

Cable lengths; see Ethernet standards and cable lengths on page 2-33.

The effect of strong winds on the installation; see ODU wind loading on page 3-11.
Page 3-7
Chapter 3: System planning
Site planning
Power supply site selection
When selecting a site for the ODU power supply, consider the following factors:

Indoor location with no possibility of condensation, flooding or high humidity.

Availability of a mains electricity supply.

Located in an environment where it is not likely to exceed its operational temperature rating, allowing
for natural convection cooling.

Accessibility for viewing status indicator LED and connecting Ethernet cables.

Cable lengths; see Ethernet standards and cable lengths on page 2-33.
Maximum cable lengths
When installing PMP/PTP 450i Series ODU, the maximum permitted length of the shielded copper
Ethernet interface cable is 330 feet (100m) from AP/BHM/SM/BHS to their associated power supplies or
CMM4.
When installing PMP 450m Series ODU, the maximum permitted length of the shielded copper Ethernet
interface cable is 330 feet ( 100m) from ODU to the network interface equipment.
Grounding and lightning protection
Warning
Electro-magnetic discharge (lightning) damage is not covered under warranty. The
recommendations in this guide, when followed correctly, give the user the best protection
from the harmful effects of EMD. However 100% protection is neither implied nor possible.
Structures, equipment and people must be protected against power surges (typically caused by lightning)
by conducting the surge current to ground via a separate preferential solid path. The actual degree of
protection required depends on local conditions and applicable local regulations. To adequately protect a
PMP/PTP 450 Platform installation, both ground bonding and transient voltage surge suppression are
required.
Full details of lightning protection methods and requirements can be found in the international standards
IEC 61024-1 and IEC 61312-1, the U.S. National Electric Code ANSI/NFPA No. 70-1984 or section 54 of
the Canadian Electric Code.
Warning
International and national standards take precedence over the requirements in this guide.
Page 3-8
Chapter 3: System planning
Site planning
Lightning protection zones
Use the rolling sphere method (Figure 45) to determine where it is safe to mount equipment. An
imaginary sphere, typically 50 meters in radius, is rolled over the structure. Where the sphere rests
against the ground and a strike termination device (such as a finial or ground bar), all the space under the
sphere is considered to be in the zone of protection (Zone B). Similarly, where the sphere rests on two
finials, the space under the sphere is considered to be in the zone of protection.
Figure 45 Rolling sphere method to determine the lightning protection zones
Zone A: In this zone a direct lightning strike is possible. Do not mount equipment in this zone.
Zone B: In this zone, direct EMD (lightning) effects are still possible, but mounting in this zone
significantly reduces the possibility of a direct strike. Mount equipment in this zone.
Warning
Never mount equipment in Zone A. Mounting in Zone A may put equipment, structures and
life at risk.
Page 3-9
Chapter 3: System planning
Site planning
Site grounding system
Confirm that the site has a correctly installed grounding system on a common ground ring with access
points for grounding the 450 Platform Family ODU.
If the outdoor equipment is to be installed on the roof of a high building (Figure 42), confirm that the
following additional requirements are met:

A grounding conductor is installed around the roof perimeter to form the main roof perimeter lightning
protection ring.

Air terminals are installed along the length of the main roof perimeter lightning protection ring,
typically every 6.1m (20ft).

The main roof perimeter lightning protection ring contains at least two down conductors connected to
the grounding electrode system. The down conductors should be physically separated from one
another, as far as practical.
ODU and external antenna location
Find a location for the ODU (and external antenna for connectorized units) that meets the following
requirements:

The equipment is high enough to achieve the best radio path.

People can be kept a safe distance away from the equipment when it is radiating. The safe
separation distances are defined in Calculated distances and power compliance margins on page 424.

The equipment is lower than the top of the supporting structure (tower, mast or building) or its
lightning air terminal.

If the ODU is connectorized, select a mounting position that gives it maximum protection from the
elements, but still allows easy access for connecting and weatherproofing the cables. To minimize
cable losses, select a position where the antenna cable lengths can be minimized. If diverse or two
external antennas are being deployed, it is not necessary to mount the ODU at the midpoint of the
antennas.
ODU ambient temperature limits
Select a location where the ODU can operate within safe ambient temperature limits. The following points
need to be considered while selecting a location for the ODU:

The ODU must be mounted in a Restricted Access Location (as defined in EN 60950-1) if the
operating ambient temperature may exceed 40°C, including solar radiation.

If the ambient temperature never exceeds 40°C, the temperature of the external metal case parts of
the ODU will not exceed the touch temperature limit of 70°C.

If the ambient temperature never exceeds 60°C, the temperature of the external metal case parts of
the ODU will not exceed the touch temperature limit of 90°C.
Page 3-10
Chapter 3: System planning
Site planning
Note
A restricted access location is defined (in EN 60950-1) as one where access may only be
gained by use of a tool or lock and key, or other means of security, and access is controlled
by the authority responsible for the location. Access must only be gained by persons who
have been instructed about the reasons for the restrictions applied to the location and about
any precautions that must be taken. Examples of permissible restricted access locations are
a lockable equipment room or a lockable cabinet.
ODU wind loading
Ensure that the ODU and the structure on which it is mounted are capable of withstanding the prevalent
wind speeds at a proposed 450 Platform site. Wind speed statistics are available from national
meteorological offices.
The ODU and its mounting bracket are capable of withstanding wind speeds of:

Up to 200 mph (322 kph) for PMP 450m Series – AP 5 GHz

Up to 124 mph (Integrated) for PMP/PTP 450i – all models 3 GHz and 5 GHz

Up to 200 mph (Connectorized) for PMP/PTP 450i – all models 3 GHz and 5 GHz

Up to 200 mph (322 kph) for PMP/PTP 450 – all models

Up to 200 mph (322 kph) for PMP 450 – Ruggedized

Up to 200 mph (322 kph) for PMP 450i – all models 900 MHz

Up to 118 mph (191 kph) for PMP 450b

Up to 90 mph (145 kph) for PMP 450d

Up to 100 mph (161 kph) for 900 MHz antennas
Wind blowing on the ODU will subject the mounting structure to significant lateral force. The magnitude of
the force depends on both wind strength and surface area of the ODU. Wind loading is estimated using
the following formulae:

Force (in kilograms) = 0.1045aV2
where:
o “a” is the surface area in square meters, and
o “V” is the wind speed in meters per second.

Force (in pounds) = 0.0042Av2
where:
o “A” is the surface area in square feet, and
o “v” is the wind speed in miles per hour.
Applying these formulae to the 450 platform at different wind speeds, the resulting wind loadings are
shown in below tables.
Page 3-11
Chapter 3: System planning
Site planning
Table 69 PMP 450m Series wind loading (Newton)
Type of ODU
Integrated 90º sector
antenna
Max surface area
(square meters)
Wind speed (kilometer per hour)
160
170
180
190
200
0.331
671
757
849
946
1048
Table 70 PMP/PTP 450i Series wind loading (Newton)
Type of ODU
Max surface area
(square meters)
Wind speed (kilometer per hour)
160
170
180
190
200
Connectorized
0.035
94
106
119
132
146
Directional Yagi
antenna - 900 MHz
0.025
67
76
85
94
105
External 65º sector
antenna – 900 MHz
0.253
677
764
857
954
1058
Directional antenna –
3.x GHz
0.1
142
160
180
200
222
Integrated 90º sector
antenna -3.x GHz
0.18
83
94
105
117
130
Directional antenna –
5 GHz
0.093
249
281
315
351
389
Integrated 90º sector
antenna - 5 GHz
0.126
337
381
427
475
527
Table 71 PMP 450m Series wind loading (lb force)
Type of ODU
Integrated 90º sector
antenna
Max surface area
(square feet)
Wind speed (miles per hour)
100
105
110
115
120
3.565
150
165
181
198
216
Page 3-12
Chapter 3: System planning
Site planning
Table 72 PMP/PTP 450i Series wind loading (lb force)
Type of ODU
Max surface area
(square feet)
Wind speed (miles per hour)
100
105
110
115
120
Connectorized
0.377
16
17
19
21
23
Directional antenna –
5 GHz
1.001
42
46
51
56
61
Integrated 90º sector
antenna - 5 GHz
1.356
57
63
69
75
82
Directional Yagi
antenna - 900 MHz
0.27
11
13
14
15
16
External 65º sector
antenna – 900 MHz
2.72
114
126
138
151
165
For a connectorized ODU, add the wind loading of the external antenna to that of the ODU. The
antenna manufacturer should be able to quote wind loading.
Table 73 PMP/PTP 450 Series wind loading (Newton)
Type of ODU
Max surface area
(square meters)
Wind speed (kilometer per hour)
160
170
180
190
200
External 60º sector
antenna – 2.4 GHz AP
0.27
722
815
914
1019
1129
External 60º sector
antenna – 5 GHz AP
0.066
177
199
223
249
276
External 90º sector
antenna – 5 GHz AP
0.083
222
251
281
313
347
SM
0.027
72
82
91
102
113
Integrated High-Gain,
Ruggedized
0.093
249
281
315
351
389
Integrated Dish
0.14
375
423
474
528
585
Page 3-13
Chapter 3: System planning
Site planning
Table 74 PMP/PTP 450 Series wind loading (lb force)
Type of ODU
Max surface area
(square feet)
Wind speed (miles per hour)
100
105
110
115
120
External 60º sector
antenna – 2.4 GHz
AP
2.9
122
134
147
161
175
External 60º sector
antenna – 5 GHz AP
0.71
29.8
33
37
39
43
External 90º sector
antenna – 5 GHz AP
0.89
37
41
45
49
54
SM
0.29
12
13
15
16
18
Integrated HighGain, Ruggedized
42
46
51
56
60
Integrated Dish
1.49
63
69
76
83
90
Page 3-14
Chapter 3: System planning
Site planning
Hazardous locations
Check that the ODUs will not be exposed to hazardous gases, as defined by HAZLOC (USA) and ATEX
(Europe) regulations. If there is a risk of such exposure, then order the PTP/PMP 450i ATEX/Hazloc
product variants, as these are intended for operation in locations with gas hazards. The ATEX and
HAZLOC standards limit the EIRP as shown in Table 75.
Table 75 EIRP limits from ATEX and HAZLOC standards
ATEX gas
group
HAZLOC gas
group
Typical gas type
Maximum EIRP
(Watt)
IIA
Propane
IIB
Ethylene
3.5
IIC
Hydrogen
IIC
Acetylene
Further reading
For information about…
Refer to…
Ordering Connectorized/ Integrated
ATEX/HAZLOC ODUs
Table 62 and Table 63 on pages 2-61 and 2-62
ATEX/HAZLOC standards and type approval
Hazardous location compliance on page 4-32
Deployment of ATEX/HAZLOC ODUs
PMP/PTP 450i Hazardous Location Safety
Guidance (pmp-1712)
Drop cable grounding points
To estimate how many grounding kits are required for each drop cable, refer to the site installation
diagrams (Figure 40 , Figure 41, and Figure 42) and use the following criteria:

The drop cable shield must be grounded near the ODU at the first point of contact between the drop
cable and the mast, tower or building.

The drop cable shield must be grounded at the building entry point.
For mast or tower installations (Figure 40), use the following additional criteria:

The drop cable shield must be grounded at the bottom of the tower, near the vertical to horizontal
transition point. This ground cable must be bonded to the tower or tower ground bus bar (TGB), if
installed.
Page 3-15
Chapter 3: System planning
Site planning

If the tower is greater than 61 m (200 ft) in height, the drop cable shield must be grounded at the
tower midpoint, and at additional points as necessary to reduce the distance between ground cables
to 61 m (200 ft) or less.

In high lightning-prone geographical areas, the drop cable shield must be grounded at spacing
between 15 to 22 m (50 to 75 ft). This is especially important on towers taller than 45 m (150 ft).
For roof installations (Figure 42), use the following additional criteria:

The drop cable shield must be bonded to the building grounding system at its top entry point (usually
on the roof).

The drop cable shield must be bonded to the building grounding system at the entry point to the
equipment room.
Lightning Protection Unit (LPU) location
Find a location for the bottom LPU that meets the following requirements:

The bottom LPU can be connected to the drop cable from the ODU.

The bottom LPU is within 600 mm (24 in) of the point at which the drop cable enters the building,
enclosure or equipment room within a larger building.

The bottom LPU can be bonded to the grounding system.
Page 3-16
Chapter 3: System planning
Radio Frequency planning
Radio Frequency planning
This section describes how to plan 450 Platform Family links to conform to analysis of spectrum and the
regulatory restrictions that apply in the country of operation.
Regulatory limits
Many countries impose EIRP limits (Allowed EIRP) on products operating in the bands used by the 450
Platform Family.
Refer to Equipment Disposal (Chapter 10: Reference information) on page 10-49 to determine what the
maximum transmitted power and EIRP for PMP/PTP 450 Plaftrom that can be used in each of countries
and frequency band.
Caution
It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that the PMP/PTP ODU is operated in
accordance with local regulatory limits.
Note
Contact the applicable radio regulator to find out whether or not registration of the
PMP/PTP 450 Platform link is required.
Conforming to the limits
Ensure the link is configured to conform to local regulatory requirements by configuring the PMP 450/450i
Series AP or PTP 450/450i Series BHM for the correct country. In the following situations, this does not
prevent operation outside the regulations:

When using connectorized ODUs with external antennas, the regulations may require the maximum
transmit power to be reduced.
Available spectrum
The available spectrum for operation depends on the regulatory band. When configured appropriately, the
unit will only allow operation on those channels which are permitted by the regulations.
Page 3-17
Chapter 3: System planning
Radio Frequency planning
Certain regulations have allocated certain channels as unavailable for use:

FCC has allocated part of the 5.1 & 5.2 GHz

ETSI has allocated part of the 5.4 GHz band to weather radar.

UK and some other European countries have allocated part of the 5.8 GHz band to Road Transport
and Traffic Telematics (RTTT) systems.
The number and identity of channels barred in a given regulatory band is dependent on the channel
bandwidth and channel raster selected.
Analyzing the RF Environment
An essential element in RF network planning is the analysis of spectrum usage and the strength of the
signals that occupy the spectrum. Regardless of how these parameters are measured and log or chart
the results (through the Spectrum Analyzer feature or by using a spectrum analyzer), ensure
measurements are performed:

At various times of day.

On various days of the week.

Periodically into the future.
As new RF neighbors move in or consumer devices proliferate in currently used spectrum, this keeps the
user aware of the dynamic possibilities for interference within the network.
Channel bandwidth
Select the required channel bandwidth for the link. The selection depends upon the regulatory band
selected.
The wider the channel bandwidth, the greater the capacity. As narrower channel bandwidths take up less
spectrum, selecting a narrow channel bandwidth may be a better choice when operating in locations
where the spectrum is very busy.
Both ends of the link must be configured to operate on the same channel bandwidth.
Anticipating Reflection of Radio Waves
In the signal path, any object that is larger than the wavelength of the signal can reflect the signal. Such
an object can even be the surface of the earth or of a river, bay or lake. The wavelength of the signal is
approximately

2 inches (or 5 cm) for 5.4 GHz and 5.8 GHz signals.

12 inches for 900 MHz signals
A reflected signal can arrive at the antenna of the receiver later than the non-reflected signal arrives.
These two or more signals cause the condition known as multipath. Multipath may increase or decrease
the signal level, resulting in overall attenuation that may be higher or lower than that caused by the link
distance. This is problematic at the margin of the link budget, where the standard operating margin (fade
margin) may be compromised.
Page 3-18
Chapter 3: System planning
Radio Frequency planning
Obstructions in the Fresnel Zone
The Fresnel (pronounced fre∙NEL) Zone is a three-dimensional volume around the line of sight of an
antenna transmission. Objects that penetrate this area can cause the received strength of the transmitted
signal to fade. Out-of-phase reflections and absorption of the signal result in signal cancellation.
The foliage of trees and plants in the Fresnel Zone can cause signal loss. Seasonal density, moisture
content of the foliage, and other factors such as wind may change the amount of loss. Plan to perform
frequent and regular link tests if you must transmit through foliage.
Planning for co-location
The first step to avoid interference in wireless systems is to set all AP/BHMs to receive timing from a
synchronization source (Cluster Management Module, or Universal Global Positioning System). This
ensures that the modules are in sync and start transmitting at the same time each frame.
The second step to avoid interference is to configure parameters on all AP/BHMs of the same frequency
band in proximity such that they have compatible transmit/receive ratios (all stop transmitting each frame
before any start receiving). This avoids the problem of one AP/BHM attempting to receive the signal from
a distant SM/BHS while a nearby AP/BHM transmits, which could overpower that signal.
Note
Refer to Frame Alignment Legacy Mode parameter of Configuration > Radio > Adavance tab
for legacy product settings (See Table 142 PMP 450i AP Radio attributes - 5 GHz on page
7-132).
The following parameters on the AP/BHM determine the transmit/receive ratio:

Downlink Data percentage

Frame Period

Max Range

(reserved) Contention slots
If OFDM (450 Platform Family, PMP/PTP 230) and FSK (PMP/PTP 1x0) APs/BHMs of the same
frequency band and channel bandwidth are in proximity, or if you want BHMs set to different parameters
then you must use the Frame Calculator to identify compatible settings for APs/BHMs.
The co-location is also supported for 900 MHz PMP 450i Series APs (OFDM) and PMP 100 Series APs
(FSK).
The Frame Calculator is available on the web management interface Tools > Frame Calculator. To use
the Frame Calculator, type into the calculator various configurable parameter values for each proximal
AP/BHM and then record the resulting AP/BHM Receive Start value. Next vary the Downlink Data
percentage in each calculation and iterate until a calculated AP/BHM Receive Start for all co-located
AP/BHMs where the transmit end does not come before the receive start.
Cambium also provides co-location tool which helps in co-location planning:

https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/colocationtool
Page 3-19
Chapter 3: System planning
Radio Frequency planning
For more information on 450 Platform Family co-location, see
http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/solution-papers
Multiple OFDM Access Point Clusters
When deploying multiple AP clusters in a dense area, consider aligning the clusters as shown below.
However, this is only a recommendation. An installation may dictate a different pattern of channel
assignments.
Figure 46 Example layout of 16 Access Point sectors (ABCD), 90 degree sectors
An example for assignment of frequency channels is provided in the following table.
Table 76 Example 5.8 GHz 4-channel assignment by access site
Symbol
Frequency
5.740 GHz
5.780 GHz
5.760 GHz
5.800 GHz
Page 3-20
Chapter 3: System planning
Radio Frequency planning
Figure 47 Example layout of 6 Access Point sectors (ABC), 60 degree sectors
An example for assignment of frequency channels and sector IDs is provided in the following table.
Table 77 Example 5.8 GHz 3-channel assignment by access site
Symbol
Frequency
5.740 GHz
5.760 GHz
5.780 GHz
Page 3-21
Chapter 3: System planning
Radio Frequency planning
Considerations on back-to-back frequency reuse
Cambium Networks recommends to use back-to-back (ABAB) frequency reuse, as shown in Figure 46.
This means that a base site of four sectors can be created using two frequencies, which works very well
and helps define networks in situations where high capacity is required in a limited amount of spectrum.
The conditions necessary to implement this plan are:

GPS synchronization: all the access points transmit at the same time

Uplink and Downlink timings across APs do not overlap: they can be adjusted using the frame
calculators and co-location tools provided by Cambium

Uplink power control to ensure that all signals are received on the uplink at the same level: this is
automatically enabled on all sectors

There are no reflecting objects which are too large in the exclusion zones defined in this section.

The SMs do not normally have line-of-sight (LoS) to an interfering base station. The worst case range
ratio in Figure 46 is 5:1 which in LoS only gives 14 dB protection. Greater than 30 dB is required for
256QAM capability. Down tilt can be used to advantage when the elevation beamwidth is low. Also
the range ratio applies to the longest distance SM, shorter distance SMs have a better range ratio.
This frequency reuse plan may not always give 256QAM for the longest distance SMs. It is usually a
good compromise between using more spectrum and guaranteed modulation rate.
Reflecting objects
Figure 48 shows two diagrams of the same reflecting object. Uplink interference demonstrates the
situation when the two SMs are transmitting at the same time. SM2 should be received cleanly by the AP
for Sector 3. At the same time interference can arise from SM1 via the reflecting object and cause a lower
Signal-to-Interference ratio than required at AP3. This may either cause transmission errors which are
corrected by ARQ or cause the selected modulation rate to be lowered. Either may cause a lower
throughput from SM2 and therefore sector 3.
Downlink interference shows the situation when AP3 interferes with SM1. Again the transmission may be
reduced by errors or a reduction in modulation rate.
Page 3-22
Chapter 3: System planning
Radio Frequency planning
Figure 48 Reflection
Reflection likelihood guidance
As shown in the previous section, reflection can cause a decrease in throughput in an ABAB base site.
This section provides guidance on whether a reflection is likely to cause interference. The first condition
for whether a reflection can cause the data rate to reduce is that the reflecting object must be in view of
the AP and the SM in order to re-transmit the signal. If this is not the case, then the object cannot cause
interference.
Given that the potential reflecting object is seen by the AP and the SM, there are a range of object sizes
and a range of zones where we can predict that interference will occur which may reduce the throughput
when both sector 1 and sector 3 are carrying traffic.
Figure 49 and Figure 50 show regions enumerated A, B, C, and D. We also need to consider objects of
size 1, 2, 3 and 4 and define the areas where the objects may interfere.

object size 1: a flat building face with a clear reflecting property from sector to AP

object size 2: random metalwork such as a wireless tower

object size 3: a 0.5 X 0.5m flat metallic face or tree

object size 4: a 0.2 X 0.2m random metal structure or 0.5 X 0.5m foliage.
The conditions for no interference are:

size 2 outside zone B

size 3 outside zone C

size 4 outside zone D
The size 1 object can interfere at large distances. It is necessary to look at the geometry by which
reflection could occur and cause interference. Typically, this will occur at a restricted range of azimuths
and ranges.
Page 3-23
Chapter 3: System planning
Radio Frequency planning
Figure 49 Sector Antenna
Page 3-24
Chapter 3: System planning
Radio Frequency planning
Figure 50 cnMedusa Antenna
Page 3-25
Chapter 3: System planning
Radio Frequency planning
Figure 49 and Figure 50 each have three diagrams scaled in meters where Figure 49 is for the sector
antenna and Figure 50 is for cnMedusa. In each figure the distances and heights assume a typical down
tilt of 4°.
In each figure the top diagram represents the
clearances required at zero azimuth. The middle
diagram represents the scaling required to the top
diagram to allow for differences in azimuth of the
considered reflecting object. The bottom diagram is
the scaled version of the top diagram allowing for the
dotted azimuth line in the middle diagram.PMP 450m
Series planning
PMP 450m Series AP is based on Massive MU-MIMO technology. It is a 14x14 MIMO system which
allows simultaneous communication to up to seven SMs.
Figure 51 PMP 450m Series AP antenna beam
PMP 450m installation recommendations
Page 3-26
Chapter 3: System planning
Radio Frequency planning

For best performance it is recommended to have a clearance zone around the mast. The clearance
zone depends on the surrounding environment and the antenna’s down tilt. If the mast is surrounded
by metal then larger clearance is required compared to an environment where the antenna is
surrounded by foliage

SMs should be spread in azimuth of AP antenna

450m is susceptible to movement, for best MU-MIMO performance it is recommended that the 450m
AP is mounted/installed on a mast that is extremely rigid (no movement and is 100% vertical).

LINKPlanner can be used to plan SMs across the AP antenna azimuth
Page 3-27
Chapter 3: System planning
Link planning
Link planning
This section describes factors to be taken into account when planning links, such as range, obstacles
path loss and throughput. LINKPlanner is recommended.
Range and obstacles
Calculate the range of the link and identify any obstacles that may affect radio performance.
Perform a survey to identify all the obstructions (such as trees or buildings) in the path and to assess the
risk of interference. This information is necessary in order to achieve an accurate link feasibility
assessment.
The 450 Platform Family is designed to operate in Non-Line-of-Sight (NLoS) and Line-of-Sight (LoS)
environments. An NLOS environment is one in which there is no optical line-of-sight, that is, there are
obstructions between the antennas.
OFDM technology can often use multi-pathing to an advantage to overcome nLOS, especially in cases
where the Fresnel zone is only partially blocked by buildings, “urban canyons”, or foliage. OFDM tends to
help especially when obstacles are near the middle of the link, and less so when the obstacles are very
near the ODU.
However, attenuation through walls and trees is substantial for any use of the 5.4 GHz and 5.8 GHz
frequency bands. The lower frequency radio waves of 900 MHz radios provide greater penetration
through walls, trees and other obstacles, making it optimal for most non-line-of-sight applications. Even
with OFDM, these products are not expected to penetrate walls or extensive trees and foliage.
Path loss
Path loss is the amount of attenuation the radio signal undergoes between the two ends of the link. The
path loss is the sum of the attenuation of the path if there were no obstacles in the way (Free Space Path
Loss), the attenuation caused by obstacles (Excess Path Loss) and a margin to allow for possible fading
of the radio signal (Fade Margin). The following calculation needs to be performed to judge whether a
particular link can be installed:
free
_ space
 L
Where:
free _ space
excess
 L
fade
 L
seasonal
 L
capability
Is:
Free Space Path Loss (dB)
Lexcess
Excess Path Loss (dB)
Fade Margin Required (dB)
fade
Lseasona
Seasonal Fading (dB)
Page 3-28
Chapter 3: System planning
L capability
Link planning
Equipment Capability (dB)
Calculating Link Loss
The link loss is the total attenuation of the wireless signal between two point-to-multipoint units. The link
loss calculation is presented below:
Link Loss (dB) = Transmit power of the remote wireless unit (dBm) − Tx Cable loss (dB) −
Received power at the local unit (dBm) – Rx cable loss (dB) + Antenna
gain at the remote unit (dBi) + Antenna gain at the local unit (dBi)
Calculating Rx Signal Level
The determinants in Rx signal level are illustrated in Figure 52.
Figure 52 Determinants in Rx signal level
Rx signal level is calculated as follows:
Rx signal level dB = Tx power − Tx cable loss + Tx antenna gain
− free space path loss + Rx antenna gain − Rx cable loss
Note
This Rx signal level calculation presumes that a clear line of sight is established between the
transmitter and receiver and that no objects encroach in the Fresnel zone.
Page 3-29
Chapter 3: System planning
Link planning
Calculating Fade Margin
Free space path loss is a major determinant in Rx (received) signal level. Rx signal level, in turn, is a
major factor in the system operating margin (fade margin), which is calculated as follows:
System operating margin (fade margin) dB = Rx signal level dB − Rx sensitivity dB
Thus, fade margin is the difference between strength of the received signal and the strength that the
receiver requires for maintaining a reliable link. A higher fade margin is characteristic of a more reliable
link.
Adaptive modulation
Adaptive modulation ensures that the highest throughput that can be achieved instantaneously will be
obtained, taking account of propagation and interference. When the link has been installed, web pages
provide information about the link loss currently measured by the equipment, both instantaneously and
averaged. The averaged value will require maximum seasonal fading to be added, and then the radio
reliability of the link can be computed.
For details of the system throughput, link loss and maximum distance for each frequency band in all
modulation modes, see Link on page 10-45.
Page 3-30
Chapter 3: System planning
Planning for connectorized units
Planning for connectorized units
This section describes factors to be taken into account when planning to use connectorized ODUs with
external antennas in 450 Platform Family links.
When to install connectorized units
The majority of radio links can be successfully deployed with the integrated ODU. However the integrated
units may not be sufficient in some areas, for example:

Where the path is heavily obscured by dense woodland on an NLOS link.

Where long LOS links are required.

Where there are known to be high levels of interference.
In these areas, connectorized ODUs and external antennas should be used.
Choosing external antennas
When selecting external antennas, consider the following factors:

The required antenna gain.

Ease of mounting and alignment.

Use dual-polarization antenna (as the integrated antenna).
Note
Enter the antenna gain and cable loss into the Installation Wizard, if the country selected has
an EIRP limit, the corresponding maximum transmit power will be calculated automatically by
the unit.
Calculating RF cable length (5.8 GHz FCC only)
The 5.8 GHz band FCC approval for the product is based on tests with a cable loss between the ODU
and antenna of not less than 1.2 dB. If cable loss is below 1.2 dB with a 1.3 m (4 ft) diameter external
antenna, the connectorized 450 Platform Family may exceed the maximum radiated spurious emissions
allowed under FCC 5.8 GHz rules.
Cable loss depends mainly upon cable type and length. To meet or exceed the minimum loss of 1.2 dB,
use cables of the type and length specified in Table 78 (source: Times Microwave). This data excludes
connector losses.
Table 78 RF cable lengths required to achieve 1.2 dB loss at 5.8 GHz
RF cable type
Minimum cable length
Page 3-31
Chapter 3: System planning
Planning for connectorized units
LMR100
0.6 m (1.9 ft)
LMR200
1.4 m (4.6 ft)
LMR300
2.2 m (7.3 ft)
LMR400
3.4 m (11.1 ft)
LMR600
5.0 m (16.5 ft)
Page 3-32
Chapter 3: System planning
Data network planning
Data network planning
This section describes factors to be considered when planning 450 Platform Family data networks.
Understanding addresses
A basic understanding of Internet Protocol (IP) address and subnet mask concepts is required for
engineering your IP network.
IP address
The IP address is a 32-bit binary number that has four parts (octets). This set of four octets has two
segments, depending on the class of IP address. The first segment identifies the network. The second
identifies the hosts or devices on the network. The subnet mask marks a boundary between these two
sub-addresses.
Dynamic or static addressing
For any computer to communicate with a module, the computer must be configured to either

use DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). In this case, when not connected to the network,
the computer derives an IP address on the 169.254 network within two minutes.

have an assigned static IP address (for example, 169.254.1.5) on the 169.254 network.
Note
If an IP address that is set in the module is not the 169.254.x.x network address, then the
network operator must assign the computer a static IP address in the same subnet.
When a DHCP server is not found
To operate on a network, a computer requires an IP address, a subnet mask, and possibly a gateway
address. Either a DHCP server automatically assigns this configuration information to a computer on a
network or an operator must input these items.
When a computer is brought on line and a DHCP server is not accessible (such as when the server is
down or the computer is not plugged into the network), Microsoft and Apple operating systems default to
an IP address of 169.254.x.x and a subnet mask of 255.255.0.0 (169.254/16, where /16 indicates that the
first 16 bits of the address range are identical among all members of the subnet).
Page 3-33
Chapter 3: System planning
Data network planning
DNS Client
The DNS Client is used to resolve names of management servers within the operator’s management
domain (see Figure 53). This feature allows hostname configuration for NTP servers, Authorization
Servers, DHCP relay servers, and SNMP trap servers. Operators may choose to either enter in the FQDN
(Fully Qualified Domain Name) for the host name or to manually enter the IP addresses of the servers.
Figure 53 Cambium networks management domain
Network Address Translation (NAT)
NAT, DHCP Server, DHCP Client and DMZ in SM
The system provides NAT (network address translation) for SMs in the following combinations of NAT and
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol):

NAT Disabled

NAT with DHCP Client (DHCP selected as the Connection Type of the WAN interface) and DHCP
Server

NAT with DHCP Client(DHCP selected as the Connection Type of the WAN interface)

NAT with DHCP Server

NAT without DHCP
NAT
NAT isolates devices connected to the Ethernet/wired side of a SM from being seen directly from the
wireless side of the SM. With NAT enabled, the SM has an IP address for transport traffic (separate from
its address for management), terminates transport traffic, and allows you to assign a range of IP
addresses to devices that are connected to the Ethernet/wired side of the SM.
Page 3-34
Chapter 3: System planning
Data network planning
In the Cambium system, NAT supports many protocols, including HTTP, ICMP (Internet Control Message
Protocols), and FTP (File Transfer Protocol). For virtual private network (VPN) implementation, L2TP over
IPSec (Level 2 Tunneling Protocol over IP Security) and PPTP (Point to Point Tunneling Protocol) are
supported.
DHCP
DHCP enables a device to be assigned a new IP address and TCP/IP parameters, including a default
gateway, whenever the device reboots. Thus DHCP reduces configuration time, conserves IP addresses,
and allows modules to be moved to a different network within the Cambium system.
In conjunction with the NAT features, each SM provides:

A DHCP server that assigns IP addresses to computers connected to the SM by Ethernet protocol.

A DHCP client that receives an IP address for the SM from a network DHCP server.
DMZ
In conjunction with the NAT features, a DMZ (demilitarized zone) allows the assignment of one IP
address behind the SM for a device to logically exist outside the firewall and receive network traffic. The
first three octets of this IP address must be identical to the first three octets of the NAT private IP address.
Developing an IP addressing scheme
Network elements are accessed through IP Version 4 (IPv4) addressing.
A proper IP addressing method is critical to the operation and security of a network.
Each module requires an IP address on the network. This IP address is for only management purposes.
For security, you must either:

Assign a non-routable IP address.

Assign a routable IP address only if a firewall is present to protect the module.
You assign an IP addresses to computers and network components by either static or dynamic IP
addressing. You will also assign the appropriate subnet mask and network gateway to each module.
Address Resolution Protocol
As previously stated, the MAC address identifies a module in:

Communications between modules.

The data that modules store about each other.
The IP address is essential for data delivery through a router interface. Address Resolution Protocol
(ARP) correlates MAC addresses to IP addresses.
Page 3-35
Chapter 3: System planning
Data network planning
For communications to outside the network segment, ARP reads the network gateway address of the
router and translates it into the MAC address of the router. Then the communication is sent to MAC
address (physical network interface card) of the router.
For each router between the sending module and the destination, this sequence applies. The ARP
correlation is stored until the ARP cache times out.
Allocating subnets
The subnet mask is a 32-bit binary number that filters the IP address. Where a subnet mask contains a bit
set to 1, the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network address.
Example IP address and subnet mask
In Figure 54, the first 16 bits of the 32-bit IP address identify the network:
Figure 54 Example of IP address in Class B subnet
Octet 1
Octet 2
Octet 3
Octet 4
IP address 169.254.1.1
10101001
11111110
00000001
00000001
Subnet mask 255.255.0.0
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
In this example, the network address is 169.254 and 216 (65,536) hosts are addressable.
Selecting non-routable IP addresses
The factory default assignments for network elements are:

Unique MAC address

IP address of 169.254.1.1

Subnet mask of 255.255.0.0

Network gateway address of 169.254.0.0
For each radio and CMM4, assign an IP address that is both consistent with the IP addressing plan for
your network and cannot be accessed from the Internet. IP addresses within the following ranges are not
routable from the Internet, regardless of whether a firewall is configured:

10.0.0.0 – 10.255.255.255

172.16.0.0 – 172.31.255.255

192.168.0.0 – 192.168.255.255
Also, the subnet mask and network gateway for each CMM4 can be assigned.
Translation bridging
Optionally, the AP can be configured to change the source MAC address in every packet it receives from
its SMs to the MAC address of the SM/BHS that bridged the packet, before forwarding the packet toward
the public network. In this case:
Page 3-36
Chapter 3: System planning
Data network planning

Not more than 128 IP devices at any time are valid to send data to the AP from behind the SM.

SM populates the Translation Table tab of its Statistics web page, displaying the MAC address and IP
address of all the valid connected devices.

Each entry in the Translation Table is associated with the number of minutes that have elapsed since
the last packet transfer between the connected device and the SM.

If 128 are connected, and another attempts to connect:
o If no Translation Table entry is older than 255 minutes, the attempt is ignored.
o If an entry is older than 255 minutes, the oldest entry is removed and the attempt is successful.

The Send Untranslated ARP parameter in the General tab of the Configuration page can be:
o Disabled, so that the AP overwrites the MAC address in ARP packets before forwarding them.
o Enabled, so that the AP forwards ARP packets regardless of whether it has overwritten the MAC
address.
This is the Translation Bridging feature, which you can enable in the General page of the Configuration
web page in the AP. When this feature is disabled, the setting of the Send Untranslated ARP parameter
has no effect, because all packets are forwarded untranslated (with the source MAC address intact). See
Address Resolution Protocol on Page 3-35.
Engineering VLANs
The radios support VLAN functionality as defined in the 802.1Q (Virtual LANs) specification, except for
the following aspects of that specification:

Protocols:
o Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP) GARV
o Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
o Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)
o GARP Multicast Registration Protocol (GMRP)

Embedded source routing (ERIF) in the 802.1Q header

Multicast pruning

Flooding unknown unicast frames in the downlink
As an additional exception, the AP/BHM does not flood downward the unknown unicast frames to the
SM/BHS.
A VLAN configuration in Layer 2 establishes a logical group within the network. Each computer in the
VLAN, regardless of initial or eventual physical location, has access to the same data. For the network
operator, this provides flexibility in network segmentation, simpler management, and enhanced security.
Page 3-37
Chapter 3: System planning
Data network planning
Special case VLAN numbers
This system handles special case VLAN numbers according to IEEE specifications:
Table 79 Special case VLAN IDs
VLAN Number
Purpose
Usage Constraint
These packets have 802.1p priority, but are
otherwise handled as untagged.
Must not be used as a
management VLAN.
Although not noted as special case by IEEE
specifications, these packets identify traffic that
was untagged upon ingress into the SM and
must remain untagged upon egress. This policy
is hard-coded in the AP.
Must not be used for
system VLAN traffic.
This VLAN is reserved for internal use.
Must not be used at all.
4095
SM membership in VLANs
With the supported VLAN functionality, the radios determine bridge forwarding on the basis of not only the
destination MAC address, but also the VLAN ID of the destination. This provides flexibility in how SMs are
used:

Each SM can be a member in its own VLAN.

Each SM can be in its own broadcast domain, such that only the radios that are members of the
VLAN can see broadcast and multicast traffic to and from the SM.

The network operator can define a work group of SMs, regardless of the AP(s) to which they register.
Page 3-38
Chapter 3: System planning
Data network planning
PMP 450 Platform Family modules provide the VLAN frame filters that are described in Table 80.
Table 80 VLAN filters in point-to-multipoint modules
then a frame is discarded if…
Where VLAN is active,
if this parameter value
is selected …
entering the bridge/
NAT switch through…
Ethernet…
any combination of VLAN
parameter settings
because of this VLAN
filter in the software:
TCP/IP…
with a VID not in the
membership table
Ingress
with a VID not in the
membership table
any combination of VLAN
parameter settings
Local Ingress
Allow Frame Types:
Tagged Frames Only
with no 802.1Q tag
Only Tagged
Allow Frame Types:
Untagged Frames Only
with an 802.1Q tag,
regardless of VID
Only Untagged
Local SM Management:
Disable in the SM, or
All Local SM
Management:
Disable in the AP
with an 802.1Q tag
and a VID in the
membership table
Local SM Management
leaving the bridge/
NAT switch through…
Ethernet…
any combination of VLAN
parameter settings
TCP/IP…
with a VID not in the
membership table
any combination of VLAN
parameter settings
Egress
with a VID not in the
membership table
Local Egress
Priority on VLANs (802.1p)
The radios can prioritize traffic based on the eight priorities described in the IEEE 802.1p specification.
When the high-priority channel is enabled on a SM, regardless of whether VLAN is enabled on the AP for
the sector, packets received with a priority of 4 through 7 in the 802.1p field are forwarded onto the highpriority channel.
Operators may configure priority precedence as 802.1p Then Diffserv (Default) or Diffserv Then 802.1p.
Since these priority precedence configurations are independent between the AP and SM, this setting
must be configured on both the AP and SM to ensure that the precedence is adhered to by both sides of
the link.
Page 3-39
Chapter 3: System planning
Data network planning
VLAN settings can also cause the module to convert received non-VLAN packets into VLAN packets. In
this case, the 802.1p priority in packets leaving the module is set to the priority established by the
DiffServ configuration.
If VLAN is enabled, immediately monitor traffic to ensure that the results are as desired. For example,
high-priority traffic may block low-priority.
Q-in-Q DVLAN (Double-VLAN) Tagging (802.1ad)
PMP and PTP modules can be configured with 802.1ad Q-in-Q DVLAN (Double-VLAN) tagging which is a
way for an operator to put an 802.1Q VLAN inside of an 802.1ad VLAN. A nested VLAN, which is the
original 802.1Q tag and a new second 802.1ad tag, allows for bridging of VLAN traffic across a network
and segregates the broadcast domains of 802.1Q VLANs. Q-in-Q can be used with PPPoE and/or NAT.
The 802.1ad standard defines the S-VLAN as the Service Provider VLAN and the C-VLAN as the
customer VLAN. The radio software does 2 layer Q-in-Q whereby the C-VLAN is the 802.1Q tag and the
S-VLAN is the second layer Q tag as shown in Table 81.
Table 81 Q-in-Q Ethernet frame
Ethernet Header
S-VLAN EthType
0x88a8
C-VLAN EthType
0x8100
IP Data EthType 0x0800
The 802.1ad S-VLAN is the outer VLAN that is configurable on the Configuration > VLAN web page of
the AP/BHM. The Q-in-Q EtherType parameter is configured with a default EtherType of 0x88a8 in
addition to four alternate EtherTypes that can be configured to aid in interoperability with existing
networks that use a different EtherType than the default.
The C-VLAN is the inner VLAN tag, which is the same as 802.1Q. As a top level concept, this operates
on the outermost tag at any given time, either “pushing” a tag on or “popping” a tag off. This means
packets will at most transition from an 802.1Q frame to an 801.ad frame (with a tag “pushed” on) or an
untagged 802.1 frame (with the tag “popped” off. Similarly, for an 802.1ad frame, this can only transition
from an 802.1ad frame to an 802.1Q frame (with the tag “popped” off) since the radio software only
supports 2 levels of tags.
Page 3-40
Chapter 3: System planning
Network management planning
Network management planning
This section describes how to plan for 450 Platform Family links to be managed remotely using SNMP.
Planning for SNMP operation
Cambium modules provide the following SNMP traps for automatic notifications to the NMS:

coldStart, which signals that the SNMPv2c element is reinitializing itself and that its configuration may
have been altered.

warmStart, which signals that the SNMPv2c element is reinitializing such that its configuration is
unaltered.

authenticationFailure, which signals that the SNMPv2c element has received a protocol message that
is not properly authenticated (contingent on the snmpEnableAuthenTraps object setting).

linkDown, as defined in RFC 1573

linkUp, as defined in RFC 1573

egpNeighborLoss, as defined in RFC 1213

whispGPSInSync, which signals a transition from not synchronized to synchronized.

whispGPSOutSync, which signals a transition from synchronized to not synchronized.

whispRegComplete, which signals registration completed.

whispRegLost, which signals registration lost.

whispRadarDetected, which signals that the one-minute scan has been completed, radar has been
detected and the radio will shut down.

whispRadarEnd, which signals that the one-minute scan has been completed, radar has not been
detected and the radio will resume normal operation.
Note
The proprietary MIBs are provided in the 450 Platform Family software download files in the
support website (see Contacting Cambium Networks on page 1).
Enabling SNMP
Enable the SNMP interface for use by configuring the following attributes in the SNMP Configuration
page:

SNMP State (default disabled)

SNMP Version (default SNMPv2c)

SNMP Port Number (default 161)
Page 3-41
Chapter 3: System planning
Security planning
Security planning
This section describes how to plan for 450 Platform Family links to operate in secure mode.

Managing module access by passwords

Filtering protocols and ports

Port Configuration
Isolating AP/BHM from the Internet
Ensure that the IP addresses of the AP/BHM in the network:

are not routable over the Internet.

do not share the subnet of the IP address of your user.
RFC 1918, Address Allocation for Private Subnets, reserves for private IP networks three blocks of IP
addresses that are not routable over the Internet:

/8 subnets have one reserved network, 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255.

/16 subnets have 16 reserved networks, 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255.

/24 subnets have 256 reserved networks, 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255.
Encrypting radio transmissions
Cambium fixed wireless broadband IP systems employ the following form of encryption for security of the
wireless link:

DES (Data Encryption Standard): An over-the-air link encryption option that uses secret 56-bit keys
and 8 parity bits. DES performs a series of bit permutations, substitutions, and recombination
operations on blocks of data. DES encryption does not affect the performance or throughput of the
system.

AES (Advanced Encryption Standard): An over-the-air link encryption option that uses the Rijndael
algorithm and 128-bit keys to establish a higher level of security than DES. AES products are certified
as compliant with the Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS 197) in the U.S.A.
The default encryption setting for 450 Platform Family ODU is "None".
Page 3-42
Chapter 3: System planning
Security planning
Planning for HTTPS operation
Before starting to configure HTTPS operation, ensure that the cryptographic material listed in Table 82 is
available.
Table 82 HTTPS security material
Item
Description
Quantity required
User Defined Security
Banner
The banner provides warnings and notices to
be read by the user before logging in to the
ODU. Use text that is appropriate to the
network security policy.
Normally one per link.
This depends upon
network policy.
Port numbers for HTTP,
HTTPS and Telnet
Port numbers allocated by the network.
As allocated by network.
Planning for SNMPv3 operation
SNMP security mode
Decide how SNMPv3 security will be configured.
MIB-based security management uses standard SNMPv3 MIBs to configure the user-based security
model and the view-based access control model. This approach provides considerable flexibility, allowing
a network operator to tailor views and security levels appropriate for different types of user. MIB-based
security management may allow a network operator to take advantage of built-in security management
capabilities of existing network managers.
Web-based security management allows an operator to configure users, security levels, privacy and
authentication protocols, and passphrases using the 450 Platform Family web-based management
interface. The capabilities supported are somewhat less flexible than those supported using the MIBbased security management, but will be sufficient in many applications. Selection of web-based
management for SNMPv3 security disables the MIB-based security management. 450 Platform Family
does not support concurrent use of MIB-based and web-based management of SNMPv3 security.
Web-based management of SNMPv3 security
Initial configuration of SNMPv3 security is available only to HTTP or HTTPS user accounts with security
role of Security Officer.
Identify the format used for SNMP Engine ID. The following formats are available:

MAC address (default)

5 and 32 hex characters (the hex character input is driven by RFC 3411 recommendations on the
Engine ID)
Identify the user names and security roles of initial SNMPv3 users. Two security roles are available:
Page 3-43
Chapter 3: System planning

Read Only

System Administrator
Security planning
Identify the security level for each of the security roles. Three security levels are available:
(a) No authentication, no privacy
(b) Authentication, no privacy
(c) Authentication, privacy
If authentication is required, identify the protocol. The authentication protocol available is MD5.
If privacy will be used, identify the protocol. The privacy protocol available is cbc-des.
Managing module access by passwords
From the factory, each module has a preconfigured administrator-level account in the name root, which
initially requires no associated password. When you upgrade a module:

An account is created in the name admin.

Both admin and root inherit the password that was previously used to access the module, if:
Full Access password, if one was set.
Display-Only Access password, if one was set and no Full Access password was set.
Caution
If you use Wireless Manager, do not delete the root account from any module. If you use a
NMS that communicates with modules through SNMP, do not delete the root account from
any module unless you first can confirm that the NMS does not rely on the root account for
access to the modules.
Each module supports four or fewer user accounts, regardless of account levels. The available levels are

ADMINISTRATOR, who has full read and write permissions. This is the level of the root and admin
users, as well as any other administrator accounts that one of them creates.

INSTALLER, who has permissions identical to those of ADMINISTRATOR except that the installer
cannot add or delete users or change the password of any other user.

TECHNICIAN, who has permissions to modify basic radio parameters and view informational web
pages.

GUEST, who has no write permissions and only a limited view of General Status tab.

Admin, Installer and Tech accounts can be configured as READ-ONLY. This will allow the account to
only see the items.
The ability to view information of General Status tab can be controlled by the "Site Information Viewable
to Guest Users" under the SNMP tab.
From the factory default state, configure passwords for both the root and admin account at the
ADMINISTRATOR permission level, using the Account > Change Users Password page. (If configure
only one of these, then the other will still require no password for access into it and thus remain a security
risk.) If you are intent on configuring only one of them, delete the admin account. The root account is
the only account that CNUT uses to update the module.
Page 3-44
Chapter 3: System planning
Security planning
After a password has been set for any ADMINISTRATOR-level account, initial access to the module GUI
opens the view of GUEST level.
Planning for RADIUS operation
Configure RADIUS where remote authentication is required for users of the web-based interface. Remote
authentication has the following advantages:

Control of passwords can be centralized.

Management of user accounts can be more sophisticated. For example; users can be prompted by a
network manager to change passwords at regular intervals. As another example, passwords can be
checked for inclusion of dictionary words and phrases.

Passwords can be updated without reconfiguring multiple network elements.

User accounts can be disabled without reconfiguring multiple network elements.
Remote authentication has one significant disadvantage in a wireless link product such as 450 Platform
Family. If the wireless link is down, a unit on the remote side of the broken link may be prevented from
contacting a RADIUS Server, with the result that users are unable to access the web-based interface.
One useful strategy would be to combine RADIUS authentication for normal operation with a single
locally-authenticated user account for emergency use.
PMP 450 Platform Family SM provides a choice of the following authentication methods:

Phase 1:
o EAP-MSCHAPv2
o EAP-TTLS
o EAP PEAP

Phase 2:
o PAP
o CHAP
o MSCHAPv2
Ensure that the authentication method selected in 450 Platform Family is supported by the RADIUS
server.
Filtering protocols and ports
Configure filters for specified protocols and ports from leaving the AP/BHM and SM/BHS and entering the
network. This protects the network from both intended and inadvertent packet loading or probing by
network users. By keeping the specified protocols or ports off the network, this feature also provides a
level of protection to users from each other.
Protocol and port filtering is set per AP/SM/BH. Except for filtering of SNMP ports, filtering occurs as
packets leave the AP/SM/BH.
For example, if SM is configured to filter SNMP, then SNMP packets are blocked from entering the SM
and, thereby, from interacting with the SNMP portion of the protocol stack on the SM.
Page 3-45
Chapter 3: System planning
Security planning
Port Filtering with NAT Enabled
Where NAT is enabled on the SM/BHS, the filtering can be enabled for only the user-defined ports. The
following are examples for situations where the configure port can be filtered where NAT is enabled:

To block a subscriber from using FTP, you can filter Ports 20 and 21 (the FTP ports) for both the TCP
and UDP protocols.

To block a subscriber from access to SNMP, you can filter Ports 161 and 162 (the SNMP ports) for
both the TCP and UDP protocols.
Note
In only the SNMP case, filtering occurs before the packet interacts with the protocol stack.
Protocol and Port Filtering with NAT Disabled
Where NAT is disabled on the SM/BHS, the filtering can be enabled for both protocols and the three userdefined ports. Using the check boxes on the interface, it can be either:

Allow all protocols except those that user wish to block.

Block all protocols except those that user wish to allow.
Allow or block any of the following protocols:

PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet)

Any or all of the following IPv4 (Internet Protocol version 4) protocols:

Any or all of the following IPv4 (Internet Protocol version 4) protocols:

SMB (Network Neighborhood)
SNMP
Bootp Client
Bootp Server
Up to 3 user-defined ports
All other IPv4 traffic (see Figure 29)
Any or all of the following IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6) protocols:
SMB (Network Neighborhood)
SNMP
Bootp Client
Bootp Server
Up to 3 user-defined ports
All other IPv6 traffic (see Figure 29)

Filter Direction – Upstream and Downstream

ARP (Address Resolution Protocol)
Page 3-46
Chapter 3: System planning
Security planning
Figure 55 Categorical protocol filtering
BootP
Server
BootP
Client
IPv4
Multica
st
SNMP
All
Other
IPv4
User
Defined
Port 1
SMB
User
Defined
Port 2
User
Defined
Port 3
ARP
PPPoE
All
Others
The following are example situations in which the protocol filtering is configured where NAT is disabled:

If a subscriber is blocked from only PPPoE and SNMP, then the subscriber retains access to all other
protocols and all ports.

If PPPoE, IPv4, and Uplink Broadcast are blocked, and also check the All others selection, then only
Address Resolution Protocol is not filtered.
The ports filtered as a result of protocol selections in the Protocol Filtering tab of the SM/BHS are listed
in Table 83.
Page 3-47
Chapter 3: System planning
Security planning
Table 83 Ports filtered per protocol selections
Protocol Selected
Port Filtered (Blocked)
Destination Ports UDP : 137, 138, 139, 445, 3702 and 1900
SMB
Destination Ports TCP : 137, 138, 139, 445, 2869, 5357 and 5358
SNMP
Destination Ports TCP and UDP : 161 and 162
Bootp Client
Source Port 68 UDP
Bootp Server
Source Port 67 UDP
User Defined Port 1..3
User defined ports for filtering UDP and TCP
IPv4 Multicast
Block IPv4 packet types except other filters defined
IPv6 Multicast
Block IPv6 packet types except other filters defined
ARP
Filter all Ethernet packet type 806
Upstream
Applies packet filtering to traffic coming into the FEC interface
Downstream
Applies packet filtering to traffic destined to exit the FEC interface
Port Configuration
450 Platform Family supports access to various communication protocols and only the ports required for
these protocols are available for access by external entities. Operators may change the port numbers for
these protocols via the radio GUI or SNMP.
Table 84 Device default port numbers
Port
Usage
Port Usage
Device
21
FTP
Listen Port
AP, SM
80
HTTP
Listen Port
AP, SM
443
HTTPS
Listen Port
AP, SM
161
SNMP port
Listen Port
AP, SM
162
SNMP trap port
Destination Port
AP, SM
514
Syslog Server port
Destination Port
AP, SM
1812
Standard RADIUS port
Destination Port
AP
1813
Standard RADIUS accounting port
Destination Port
AP, SM
Page 3-48
Chapter 3: System planning
Security planning
Encrypting downlink broadcasts
An AP can be enabled to encrypt downlink broadcast packets such as the following:

ARP

NetBIOS

broadcast packets containing video data on UDP.
The encryption used is DES for a DES-configured module and AES for an AES-configured module.
Before the Encrypt Downlink Broadcast feature is enabled on the AP, air link security must be enabled on
the AP.
Isolating SMs in PMP
In an AP, SMs in the sector can be prevented from directly communicating with each other. In CMM4, the
connected APs can be prevented from directly communicating with each other, which prevents SMs that
are in different sectors of a cluster from communicating with each other.
In the AP, the SM Isolation parameter is available in the General tab of the Configuration web page.
Configure the SM Isolation feature by any of the following selections from drop-down menu:

Disable SM Isolation (the default selection). This allows full communication between SMs.

Enable Option 1 - Block SM destined packets from being forwarded. This prevents both
multicast/broadcast and unicast SM-to-SM communication.

Enable Option 2 - Forward SM destined packets upstream. This not only prevents
multicast/broadcast and unicast SM-to-SM communication but also sends the packets, which
otherwise may have been handled SM to SM, through the Ethernet port of the AP.
In the CMM and the CMM4, SM isolation treatment is the result of how to manage the port-based VLAN
feature of the embedded switch, where all traffic can be switched from any AP to a specified uplink port.
However, this is not packet level switching. It is not based on VLAN IDs.
Filtering management through Ethernet
Configure the SM to disallow any device that is connected to its Ethernet port from accessing the IP
address of the SM. If the Ethernet Access Control parameter is set to Enabled, then:

No attempt to access the SM management interface (by http, SNMP, ftp, or tftp) through Ethernet is
granted.

Any attempt to access the SM management interface over the air (by IP address, presuming that
LAN1 Network Interface Configuration, Network Accessibility is set to Public, or by link from the
Session Status or Remote Subscribers tab in the AP) is unaffected.
Page 3-49
Chapter 3: System planning
Security planning
Allowing management from only specified IP
addresses
The Security sub-menu of the Configuration web page in the AP/BHM and SM/BHS includes the IP
Access Control parameter. Specify one, two, or three IP addresses that must be allowed to access the
management interface (by HTTP, SNMP, FTP or TFTP).
If the selection is:

IP Access Filtering Disabled, then management access is allowed from any IP address, even if the
Allowed Source IP 1 to 3 parameters are populated.

IP Access Filtering Enabled, and specify at least one address in the Allowed Source IP 1 to 3
parameter, then management access is limited to the specified address(es).
Configuring management IP by DHCP
The Configuration > IP web page of every radio contains a LAN1 Network Interface Configuration,
DHCP State parameter that, if enabled, causes the IP configuration (IP address, subnet mask, and
gateway IP address) to be obtained through DHCP instead of the values of those individual parameters.
The setting of this DHCP state parameter is also viewable, but is not settable, in the Network Interface tab
of the Home page.
In the SM/BHS, this parameter is settable

in the NAT tab of the Configuration web page, but only if NAT is enabled.

in the IP tab of the Configuration web page, but only if the Network Accessibility parameter in the IP
tab is set to Public.
DHCP option 81
The DHCP server can be used to register and update the pointer (PTR) and host (A) DNS resource
records on behalf of its DHCP-enabled clients.
The DHCP option 81 permits the client to provide its fully qualified domain name (FQDN) as well as
instructions to the DHCP server on how it would like the server to process DNS dynamic updates (if any)
on its behalf. The hostname is poplulated as SiteName.DomainName depending upon following
conditions:

If Sitename is default i.e. No Site Name , mac address will be used instead.

The SiteName should only be a-z | A-Z | 0-9 and period(.) and dash(-).

The domain name part should not start or end with dash (-).

The underscore or space in domain name part will be converted to dash(-), anything else apart from
valid characters will be skipped.
Page 3-50
Chapter 3: System planning
Security planning
Controlling PPPoE PADI Downlink Forwarding
The AP supports the control of forwarding of PPPoE PADI (PPPoE Active Discovery Initiation) packets.
This forwarding is configured on the AP GUI Configuration > Radio page by parameter PPPoE PADI
Downlink Forwarding. When set to “Enabled”, the AP allows downstream and upstream transmission of
PPPoE PADI packets. When set to “Disabled”, the AP does NOT allow PPPoE PADI packets to be sent
out of the AP RF interface (downstream) but will allow PPPoE PADI packets to enter the RF interface
(upstream) and exit the Ethernet interface.
Page 3-51
Chapter 3: System planning
Remote AP Deployment
Remote AP Deployment
In cases where the subscriber population is widely distributed, or conditions such as geography restrict
network deployment, you can add a Remote AP to:

provide high-throughput service to near LoS business subscribers.

reach around obstructions or penetrate foliage with non-LoS throughput.

reach new, especially widely distributed, residential subscribers with broadband service.

pass sync to an additional RF hop.
In the remote AP configuration, a remote AP is co-located with an SM. The remote AP distributes the
signal to SMs that are logically behind the co-located SM. A remote AP deployment is illustrated in Figure
56.
Figure 56 Remote AP deployment
The co-located SM receives data in one channel, and the remote AP must redistribute the data in a
different channel. The two channels need to have a frequency gap equal to at least two times the used
channel bandwidth.
Base your selection of frequency band ranges on regulatory restrictions, environmental conditions, and
throughput requirements.
Note
Each relay hop (additional daisy-chained remote AP) adds approximately 5-7 msec round
trip latency.
Page 3-52
Chapter 3: System planning
Remote AP Deployment
Remote AP (RAP) Performance
The performance of a remote AP is identical to the AP performance in cluster. Throughputs, ranges, and
antenna coverage are identical.
As with all equipment operating in the unlicensed spectrum, Cambium strongly recommends that you
perform site surveys before you add network elements. These will indicate that spectrum is available in
the area where you want to grow. Keep in mind that:

non-LoS ranges heavily depend on environmental conditions.

in most regions, not all frequencies are available.

your deployments must be consistent with local regulatory restrictions.
Example Use Case for RF Obstructions
A remote AP can be used to provide last-mile access to a community where RF obstructions prevent SMs
from communicating with the higher-level AP in cluster. For example, you may be able to use 900 MHz for
the last mile between a remote AP and the outlying SMs where these subscribers cannot form good links
to a higher-level 5 GHz AP. In this case, the ability of the 900-MHz wavelength to be effective around
foliage at short range solves the foliage penetration problem.
An example of this use case is shown in Figure 57.
In this example, the 5 GHz AP is a PMP 450i AP in the 5.8 GHz band operating on a 20 MHz channel
with a 2.5 ms frame; the SMs are 5 GHz PMP 450 integrated SMs. The SM connected to the remote AP
is a PMP 450i SM.
The remote AP is a PMP 450i AP in the 900 MHz band, also operating in a 20 MHz channel with a 2.5 ms
frame; the SMs are 900 MHz PMP 450 connectorized SMs using the Cambium 23 dBi gain antenna.
Page 3-53
Chapter 3: System planning
Remote AP Deployment
Figure 57 Example for 900-MHz remote AP behind 5 GHz SM
The 5 GHz modules provide a sustained aggregate throughput of up to 126 Mbps to the sector. One of
the SMs in the sector is wired to a 900-MHz remote AP, which provides NLoS sustained aggregate
throughput2 of:

126 Mbps to 900-MHz SMs up to 4 miles away in the sector.

94 Mbps to 900-MHz SMs between 4 and 10 miles away in the sector.
Example Use Case for Passing Sync
All radios support the remote AP functionality. The BHS and the SM can reliably pass the sync pulse, and
the BHM and AP can reliably receive it.
However, not all devices are compatible with all other devices. The following table shows which SMs can
be connected to which APs.
Devices
PMP 450 SM/BHS
PMP 450i SM/BHS
PMP 450 AP/BHM
PMP 450i AP/BHM
PMP 450m AP
Examples of passing sync over cable are shown under Passing Sync in an Additional Hop on page 3-57.
NLoS ranges depend on environmental conditions. Your results may vary from these.
Page 3-54
Chapter 3: System planning
Remote AP Deployment
For PMP 450, the sync is passed in a cable that connects Pins 1 and 6 of the RJ-11 timing ports of the
two modules.
For PMP 450i/450m the sync is passed in a cable that connects Pins7 and 8 of the RJ-45 timing ports of
the two modules.
When connecting modules in this way, make sure the AP and SM are properly configured, as described
in the Wiring to Extend Network Sync.
Physical Connections Involving the Remote AP
The SM to which a remote AP is connected to can be either an SM that serves a customer or an SM that
simply serves as a relay. If the SM serves a customer, wire the remote AP to the SM as shown in Figure
58.
Figure 58 Remote AP wired to SM that also serves a customer
If the SM simply serves as a relay, you must use a straight-through RJ-45 female-to-female coupler and
wire the SM to the remote AP as shown in Figure 59.
Page 3-55
Chapter 3: System planning
Remote AP Deployment
Figure 59 Remote AP wired to SM that serves as a relay
Page 3-56
Chapter 3: System planning
Remote AP Deployment
Passing Sync signal
Passing Sync in a Single Hop
Network sync can be passed in a single hop in the following network designs:

Design 1
o A CMM provides sync to a co-located AP.
o This AP sends the sync over the air to SMs.

Design 2
o A CMM provides sync to a co-located BH timing master.
o This BH timing master sends the sync over the air to a BH timing slave.
Passing Sync in an Additional Hop
Network sync can be extended by one additional link in any of the following network designs:
Note
In each of these following designs, Link 2 is not on the same frequency band as Link 4. (For
example, Link 2 may be a 5.2 GHz link while Link 4 is a 5.7 or 2.4 GHz link.)

Design 3
o A CMM provides sync to a co-located AP.
o This AP sends the sync over the air to an SM.
o This SM delivers the sync to a co-located AP.
o This AP passes the sync in the additional link over the air to SMs.
This design is illustrated in Figure 60.
Figure 60 Additional link to extend network sync, Design 3

Design 4
Page 3-57
Chapter 3: System planning
Remote AP Deployment
A CMM provides sync to a co-located AP.
This AP sends the sync over the air to an SM.
This SM delivers the sync to a co-located BHM.
This BHM passes the sync in the additional link over the air to a BHS.
This design is illustrated in Figure 61.
Figure 61 Additional link to extend network sync, Design 4
Page 3-58
Chapter 3: System planning

Remote AP Deployment
Design 5
o A CMM provides sync to a co-located BHM or the BHM generates timing.
o This BHM sends the sync over the air to a BHS.
o This BHS delivers the sync to a co-located AP.
This AP passes the sync in the additional link over the air to SMs.
This design is illustrated in Figure 62.
Figure 62 Additional link to extend network sync, Design 5
Wiring and configuration information for this sync extension is described under Wiring to Extend Network
Sync on page 3-60.
Page 3-59
Chapter 3: System planning
Remote AP Deployment
Wiring to Extend Network Sync
The following procedure can be used to extend network sync by one additional hop, as described under
Passing Sync in an Additional Hop on page 3-57. When a co-located module receives sync over the air,
the co-located modules can be wired to pass the sync as follows:
1. Connect the GPS Utility ports of the co-located modules using a sync cable with RJ-11 (for 450)
or RJ-45 (for 450i/450m) connectors.
2. Set the Sync Input parameter on the Configuration page of the co-located AP or BH timing master
to AutoSync.
3. Set the Device Type parameter on the Configuration page of the co-located AP or BH timing
master to Remote.
4. Set the Sync Output to Aux Port parameter on the Configuration page of the co-located AP or BH
timing master to Disabled.
5. Set the UGPS Power parameter on the Configuration page of the co-located AP or BH timing
master to Disabled.
6. Set the Frame Timing Pulse Gated parameter on the Configuration page of the co-located SM or
BH timing slave to Enable.
Note
This setting prevents interference in the event that the SM or BH timing slave loses sync.
Figure 63 Co-located AP or BH timing master Sync Setting configuration
Page 3-60
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory
information
This chapter provides end user license agreements and regulatory notifications.
Caution
Intentional or unintentional changes or modifications to the equipment must not be made
unless under the express consent of the party responsible for compliance. Any such
modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment and will void the
manufacturer’s warranty.
Attention
Changements ou modifications Intentionnels ou non de l'équipement ne doivent pas être
entrepris sans l'autorisation de l’organisme responsable de la déclaration de conformité.
Ces modifications ou changements pourraient invalider le droit de l'utilisateur à utiliser cet
appareil et annuleraient la garantie du fabricant.
The following topics are described in this chapter:

Cambium Networks end user license agreement on page 4-2 contains the Cambium and third party
license agreements for the 450 Platform Family ODUs.

Compliance with safety standards on page 4-22 lists the safety specifications against which the 450
Platform Family has been tested and certified. It also describes how to keep RF exposure within safe
limits.

Compliance with radio regulations on page 4-34 describes how the 450 Platform Family complies with
the radio regulations that are in force in various countries, and contains notifications made to
regulatory bodies for the 450 Platform Family.
Page 4-1
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
Cambium Networks end user license
agreement
Definitions
In this Agreement, the word “Software” refers to the set of instructions for computers, in executable form
and in any media, (which may include diskette, CD-ROM, downloadable internet, hardware, or firmware)
licensed to you. The word “Documentation” refers to electronic or printed manuals and accompanying
instructional aids licensed to you. The word “Product” refers to Cambium Networks’ fixed wireless
broadband devices for which the Software and Documentation is licensed for use.
Acceptance of this agreement
In connection with Cambium Networks’ delivery of certain proprietary software or products containing
embedded or pre-loaded proprietary software, or both, Cambium Networks is willing to license this certain
proprietary software and the accompanying documentation to you only on the condition that you accept
all the terms in this End User License Agreement (“Agreement”).
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT USE THE PRODUCT OR
INSTALL THE SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, YOU MAY, FOR A FULL REFUND, RETURN THIS PRODUCT
TO THE LOCATION WHERE YOU ACQUIRED IT OR PROVIDE WRITTEN VERIFICATION OF
DELETION OF ALL COPIES OF THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE PRODUCT, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR ACCEPTANCE TO THE
TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT.
Grant of license
Cambium Networks Limited (“Cambium”) grants you (“Licensee” or “you”) a personal, nonexclusive, nontransferable license to use the Software and Documentation subject to the Conditions of Use set forth in
“Conditions of use” and the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Any terms or conditions relating to
the Software and Documentation appearing on the face or reverse side of any purchase order, purchase
order acknowledgment or other order document that are different from, or in addition to, the terms of this
Agreement will not be binding on the parties, even if payment is accepted.
Page 4-2
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
Conditions of use
Any use of the Software and Documentation outside of the conditions set forth in this Agreement is strictly
prohibited and will be deemed a breach of this Agreement.
1. Only you, your employees or agents may use the Software and Documentation. You will take all
necessary steps to insure that your employees and agents abide by the terms of this Agreement.
2. You will use the Software and Documentation (i) only for your internal business purposes; (ii) only as
described in the Software and Documentation; and (iii) in strict accordance with this Agreement.
3. You may use the Software and Documentation, provided that the use is in conformance with the terms
set forth in this Agreement.
4. Portions of the Software and Documentation are protected by United States copyright laws,
international treaty provisions, and other applicable laws. Therefore, you must treat the Software like any
other copyrighted material (for example, a book or musical recording) except that you may either: (i) make
1 copy of the transportable part of the Software (which typically is supplied on diskette, CD-ROM, or
downloadable internet), solely for back-up purposes; or (ii) copy the transportable part of the Software to
a PC hard disk, provided you keep the original solely for back-up purposes. If the Documentation is in
printed form, it may not be copied. If the Documentation is in electronic form, you may print out 1 copy,
which then may not be copied. With regard to the copy made for backup or archival purposes, you agree
to reproduce any Cambium Networks copyright notice, and other proprietary legends appearing thereon.
Such copyright notice(s) may appear in any of several forms, including machine-readable form, and you
agree to reproduce such notice in each form in which it appears, to the extent it is physically possible to
do so. Unauthorized duplication of the Software or Documentation constitutes copyright infringement, and
in the United States is punishable in federal court by fine and imprisonment.
5. You will not transfer, directly or indirectly, any product, technical data or software to any country for
which the United States Government requires an export license or other governmental approval without
first obtaining such license or approval.
Page 4-3
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
Title and restrictions
If you transfer possession of any copy of the Software and Documentation to another party outside of the
terms of this agreement, your license is automatically terminated. Title and copyrights to the Software and
Documentation and any copies made by you remain with Cambium Networks and its licensors. You will
not, and will not permit others to: (i) modify, translate, decompile, bootleg, reverse engineer, disassemble,
or extract the inner workings of the Software or Documentation, (ii) copy the look-and-feel or functionality
of the Software or Documentation; (iii) remove any proprietary notices, marks, labels, or logos from the
Software or Documentation; (iv) rent or transfer all or some of the Software or Documentation to any other
party without Cambium’s prior written consent; or (v) utilize any computer software or hardware which is
designed to defeat any copy protection device, should the Software and Documentation be equipped with
such a protection device. If the Software and Documentation is provided on multiple types of media (such
as diskette, CD-ROM, downloadable internet), then you will only use the medium which best meets your
specific needs, and will not loan, rent, lease, or transfer the other media contained in the package without
Cambium’s written consent. Unauthorized copying of the Software or Documentation, or failure to comply
with any of the provisions of this Agreement, will result in automatic termination of this license.
Confidentiality
You acknowledge that all Software and Documentation contain valuable proprietary information and trade
secrets and that unauthorized or improper use of the Software and Documentation will result in
irreparable harm to Cambium Networks for which monetary damages would be inadequate and for which
Cambium Networks will be entitled to immediate injunctive relief. If applicable, you will limit access to the
Software and Documentation to those of your employees and agents who need to use the Software and
Documentation for your internal business purposes, and you will take appropriate action with those
employees and agents to preserve the confidentiality of the Software and Documentation, using the same
degree of care to avoid unauthorized or improper disclosure as you use for the protection of your own
proprietary software, but in no event less than reasonable care.
You have no obligation to preserve the confidentiality of any proprietary information that: (i) was in the
public domain at the time of disclosure; (ii) entered the public domain through no fault of yours; (iii) was
given to you free of any obligation to keep it confidential; (iv) is independently developed by you; or (v) is
disclosed as required by law provided that you notify Cambium Networks prior to such disclosure and
provide Cambium Networks with a reasonable opportunity to respond.
Page 4-4
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
Right to use Cambium’s name
Except as required in “Conditions of use”, you will not, during the term of this Agreement or thereafter,
use any trademark of Cambium Networks, or any word or symbol likely to be confused with any Cambium
Networks trademark, either alone or in any combination with another word or words.
Transfer
The Software and Documentation may not be transferred to another party without the express written
consent of Cambium Networks, regardless of whether or not such transfer is accomplished by physical or
electronic means. Cambium’s consent may be withheld at its discretion and may be conditioned upon
transferee paying all applicable license fees and agreeing to be bound by this Agreement.
Updates
During the first 12 months after purchase of a Product, or during the term of any executed Maintenance
and Support Agreement for the Product, you are entitled to receive Updates. An “Update” means any
code in any form which is a bug fix, patch, error correction, or minor enhancement, but excludes any
major feature added to the Software. Updates are available for download at the support website.
Major features may be available from time to time for an additional license fee. If Cambium Networks
makes available to you major features and no other end user license agreement is provided, then the
terms of this Agreement will apply.
Maintenance
Except as provided above, Cambium Networks is not responsible for maintenance or field service of the
Software under this Agreement.
Page 4-5
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
Disclaimer
CAMBIUM NETWORKS DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS,
IMPLIED, STATUTORY, OR IN ANY COMMUNICATION WITH YOU. CAMBIUM NETWORKS
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILTY, NONINFRINGEMENT, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE
SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION ARE PROVIDED “AS IS.” CAMBIUM NETWORKS DOES NOT
WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, OR THAT THE OPERATION
OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE
SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED. CAMBIUM NETWORKS MAKES NO WARRANTY WITH
RESPECT TO THE CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, OR RELIABILITY OF THE SOFTWARE AND
DOCUMENTATION. Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties, so the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Limitation of liability
IN NO EVENT SHALL CAMBIUM NETWORKS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PARTY FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY OR
OTHER DAMAGE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION,
LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS, OR FROM ANY BREACH
OF WARRANTY, EVEN IF CAMBIUM NETWORKS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. (Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential
damages, so the above exclusion or limitation may not apply to you.) IN NO CASE SHALL CAMBIUM’S
LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT YOU PAID FOR THE PRODUCT.
U.S. government
If you are acquiring the Product on behalf of any unit or agency of the U.S. Government, the following
applies. Use, duplication, or disclosure of the Software and Documentation is subject to the restrictions
set forth in subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software – Restricted Rights
clause at FAR 52.227-19 (JUNE 1987), if applicable, unless being provided to the Department of
Defense. If being provided to the Department of Defense, use, duplication, or disclosure of the Products
is subject to the restricted rights set forth in subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and
Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 (OCT 1988), if applicable. Software and
Documentation may or may not include a Restricted Rights notice, or other notice referring specifically to
the terms and conditions of this Agreement. The terms and conditions of this Agreement will each
continue to apply, but only to the extent that such terms and conditions are not inconsistent with the rights
provided to you under the aforementioned provisions of the FAR and DFARS, as applicable to the
particular procuring agency and procurement transaction.
Page 4-6
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
Term of license
Your right to use the Software will continue in perpetuity unless terminated as follows. Your right to use
the Software will terminate immediately without notice upon a breach of this Agreement by you. Within 30
days after termination of this Agreement, you will certify to Cambium Networks in writing that through your
best efforts, and to the best of your knowledge, the original and all copies, in whole or in part, in any form,
of the Software and all related material and Documentation, have been destroyed, except that, with prior
written consent from Cambium Networks, you may retain one copy for archival or backup purposes. You
may not sublicense, assign or transfer the license or the Product, except as expressly provided in this
Agreement. Any attempt to otherwise sublicense, assign or transfer any of the rights, duties or obligations
hereunder is null and void.
Governing law
This Agreement is governed by the laws of the United States of America to the extent that they apply and
otherwise by the laws of the State of Illinois.
Assignment
This agreement may not be assigned by you without Cambium’s prior written consent.
Survival of provisions
The parties agree that where the context of any provision indicates an intent that it survives the term of
this Agreement, then it will survive.
Entire agreement
This agreement contains the parties’ entire agreement regarding your use of the Software and may be
amended only in writing signed by both parties, except that Cambium Networks may modify this
Agreement as necessary to comply with applicable laws.
Third party software
The software may contain one or more items of Third-Party Software supplied by other third-party
suppliers. The terms of this Agreement govern your use of any Third-Party Software UNLESS A
SEPARATE THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE LICENSE IS INCLUDED, IN WHICH CASE YOUR USE OF
THE THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE WILL THEN BE GOVERNED BY THE SEPARATE THIRD-PARTY
LICENSE.
Page 4-7
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
Net SNMP
Various copyrights apply to this package, listed in various separate parts below. Please make sure that
you read all the parts.
---- Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like) ----Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University
Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000
Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and
without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both
that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of
CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to
distribution of the software without specific written permission.
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES
WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR
PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS
ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.
---- Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright © 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
Page 4-8
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD) ----Portions of this code are copyright © 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara,
California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved.
Use is subject to license terms below.
This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun
Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
Page 4-9
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 5: Sparta, Inc copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright © 2003-2008, Sparta, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 6: Cisco/BUPTNIC copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright © 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network
Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
Page 4-10
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications, nor the names
of their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 7: Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright © Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003
oss@fabasoft.com
Author: Bernhard Penz
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

The name of Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG or any of its subsidiaries, brand or product
names may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific
prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
OpenSSL
Copyright (c) 1998-2008 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Page 4-11
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/)”
4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please
contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their
names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
(http://www.openssl.org/)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product
includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Original SSLeay License
Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation
was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are
adhered to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash,
DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered
by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed.
Page 4-12
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of
the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation
(online or textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)”
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic
related.
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application
code) you must include an acknowledgement:
“This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The license and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be
changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution license [including the
GNU Public License.]
Zlib
Copyright © 1995-2005 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
This software is provided ‘as-is’, without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be
held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications,
and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original
software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would
be appreciated but is not required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the
original software.
Page 4-13
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.
Jean-loup Gailly jloup@gzip.org
Mark Adler madler@alumni.caltech.edu
Libpng
libpng versions 1.2.6, August 15, 2004, through 1.2.35, February 14, 2009, are Copyright © 2004, 20062008 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as
libpng-1.2.5 with the following individual added to the list of Contributing Authors
Cosmin Truta
libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.5 - October 3, 2002, are Copyright © 2000-2002 Glenn
Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.0.6 with
the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors
Simon-Pierre Cadieux
Eric S. Raymond
Gilles Vollant
and with the following additions to the disclaimer:
There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the library or against infringement. There
is no warranty that our efforts or the library will fulfil any of your particular purposes or needs. This library
is provided with all faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort is
with the user.
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright © 1998, 1999 Glenn
Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.96, with
the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors:
Tom Lane
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
Willem van Schaik
libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May 1997, are Copyright © 1996, 1997 Andreas Dilger
Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, with the following individuals
added to the list of Contributing Authors:
John Bowler
Kevin Bracey
Sam Bushell
Magnus Holmgren
Greg Roelofs
Tom Tanner
libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January 1996, are Copyright © 1995, 1996 Guy Eric
Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.
For the purposes of this copyright and license, “Contributing Authors” is defined as the following set of
individuals:
Page 4-14
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
Andreas Dilger
Dave Martindale
Guy Eric Schalnat
Paul Schmidt
Tim Wegner
The PNG Reference Library is supplied “AS IS”. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all
warranties, expressed or implied, including, without limitation, the warranties of merchantability and of
fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct,
indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages, which may result from the use of the
PNG Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of such damage.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this source code, or portions hereof, for
any purpose, without fee, subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented.
2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original
source.
3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered from any source or altered source distribution.
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. specifically permit, without fee, and encourage the use of
this source code as a component to supporting the PNG file format in commercial products. If you use
this source code in a product, acknowledgment is not required but would be appreciated.
A “png_get_copyright” function is available, for convenient use in “about” boxes and the like:
printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL));
Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is supplied in the files "pngbar.png" and "pngbar.jpg
(88x31) and "pngnow.png" (98x31).
Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark of the
Open Source Initiative.
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
glennrp at users.sourceforge.net
February 14, 2009
Bzip2
This program, "bzip2", the associated library "libbzip2", and all documentation, are copyright (C) 19962007 Julian R Seward. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original
software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would
be appreciated but is not required.
3. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the
original software.
Page 4-15
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
4. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
Julian Seward, jseward@bzip.org
USB library functions
Atmel Corporation
2325 Orchard Parkway
San Jose, Ca 95131
Copyright (c) 2004 Atmel
Page 4-16
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
Apache
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction,
and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by
the copyright owner that is granting the License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all
other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common
control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition,
"control" means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the
direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or
otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the
outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity
exercising permissions granted by this License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications,
including but not limited to software source code, documentation
source, and configuration files.
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical
transformation or translation of a Source form, including but
not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation,
and conversions to other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or
Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a
copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work
(an example is provided in the Appendix below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object
form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the
editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications
represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes
of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain
separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of,
the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including
the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions
to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally
submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner
or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of
the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted"
means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent
Page 4-17
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to
communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems,
and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the
Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but
excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise
designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity
on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and
subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of
this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual,
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable
copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of,
publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the
Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of
this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual,
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable
(except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made,
use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work,
where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable
by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their
Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s)
with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You
institute patent litigation against any entity (including a
cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work
or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct
or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses
granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate
as of the date such litigation is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the
Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without
modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You
meet the following conditions:
(a) You must give any other recipients of the Work or
Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
(b) You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices
stating that You changed the files; and
(c) You must retain, in the Source form
that You distribute, all copyright,
attribution notices from the Source
excluding those notices that do not
the Derivative Works; and
of any Derivative Works
patent, trademark, and
form of the Work,
pertain to any part of
(d) If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its
distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must
include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained
within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not
pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one
of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed
Page 4-18
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or
documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or,
within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and
wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents
of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and
do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution
notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside
or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided
that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed
as modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and
may provide additional or different license terms and conditions
for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or
for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use,
reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with
the conditions stated in this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise,
any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work
by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of
this License, without any additional terms or conditions.
Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify
the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed
with Licensor regarding such Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade
names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor,
except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the
origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or
agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each
Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or
implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions
of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the
appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any
risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory,
whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise,
unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly
negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be
liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special,
incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a
result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the
Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill,
work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all
other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor
has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing
the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer,
and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity,
or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this
Page 4-19
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only
on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf
of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify,
defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability
incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason
of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work.
To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following
boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets "[]"
replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include
the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the appropriate
comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a
file or class name and description of purpose be included on the
same "printed page" as the copyright notice for easier
identification within third-party archives.
Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License");
you may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
limitations under the License.
Page 4-20
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
D3 JS library
Copyright (c) 2013, Michael Bostock
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name Michael Bostock may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL MICHAEL BOSTOCK BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE
Page 4-21
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Compliance with safety standards
Compliance with safety standards
This section lists the safety specifications against which the 450 Platform Family has been tested and
certified. It also describes how to keep RF exposure within safe limits.
Electrical safety compliance
The 450 Platform Family hardware has been tested for compliance to the electrical safety specifications
listed in Table 85.
Table 85 Safety compliance specifications
Region
Specification
USA
UL 60950
Canada
CSA C22.2 No.60950
International
CB certified & certificate to IEC 60950
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) compliance
The EMC specification type approvals that have been granted for 450 Platform Family are listed under
Table 86.
Table 86 EMC emissions compliance
Region
Specification
USA
FCC Part 15 Class B
Canada
RSS Gen and RSS 210
International
EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2
EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1
Human exposure to radio frequency energy
Relevant standards (USA and EC) applicable when working with RF equipment are:

ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio
Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz.

Council recommendation of 12 July 1999 on the limitation of exposure of the general public to
electromagnetic fields (0 Hz to 300 GHz) (1999/519/EC) and respective national regulations.
Page 4-22
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Compliance with safety standards

Directive 2004/40/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 29 April 2004 on the minimum
health and safety requirements regarding the exposure of workers to the risks arising from physical
agents (electromagnetic fields) (18th individual Directive within the meaning of Article 16(1) of
Directive 89/391/EEC).

US FCC limits for the general population. See the FCC web site at http://www.fcc.gov, and the
policies, guidelines, and requirements in Part 1 of Title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations, as well
as the guidelines and suggestions for evaluating compliance in FCC OET Bulletin 65.

Health Canada limits for the general population. See the Health Canada web site at http://www.hcsc.gc.ca/ewh-semt/pubs/radiation/99ehd-dhm237/limits-limites_e.html and Safety Code 6.

EN 50383:2002 to 2010 Basic standard for the calculation and measurement of electromagnetic field
strength and SAR related to human exposure from radio base stations and fixed terminal stations for
wireless telecommunication systems (110 MHz - 40 GHz).

BS EN 50385:2002 Product standard to demonstrate the compliances of radio base stations and
fixed terminal stations for wireless telecommunication systems with the basic restrictions or the
reference levels related to human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic fields (110 MHz – 40
GHz) – general public.

ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) guidelines for the general
public. See the ICNIRP web site at http://www.icnirp.de/ and Guidelines for Limiting Exposure to
Time-Varying Electric, Magnetic, and Electromagnetic Fields.
Power density exposure limit
Install the radios for the 450 Platform Family of wireless solutions so as to provide and maintain the
minimum separation distances from all persons.
The applicable FCC power density exposure limit for RF energy in the 4.9, 5.4 and 5.8 GHz frequency
bands is 10 W/m2 and in 900 MHz frequency band is 6 W/m2. For more information, see Human
exposure to radio frequency energy on page 4-22.
The applicable ISEDC power density exposure limit for RF energy in unlicensed bands is 0.02619 *
(f^(0.6834)), where f is the lowest frequency of the supported band. For licensed bands, the power
density exposure limit is 0.6455 * (f^(0.5)), where f is the lowest frequency of the supported band.
Page 4-23
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Compliance with safety standards
Calculation of power density
The following calculation is based on the ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991 method, as that provides a worst case
analysis. Details of the assessment to EN50383:2002 can be provided, if required.
Peak power density in the far field of a radio frequency point source is calculated as follows:
S
P .G
4 d 2
Where:
Is:
power density in W/m2
maximum average transmit power
capability of the radio, in W
total Tx gain as a factor, converted from
dB
distance from point source, in m
Rearranging terms to solve for distance yields:
d
P.G
4 .S
Calculated distances and power compliance margins
Table 88 and Table 89 shows calculated minimum separation distances, recommended distances and
resulting margins for each frequency band and antenna combination for the USA and Canada. These are
conservative distances that include compliance margins. At these and greater separation distances, the
power density from the RF field is below generally accepted limits for the general population.
450 Platform Family ODU adheres to all applicable EIRP limits for transmit power when operating in
MIMO mode. Separation distances and compliance margins include compensation for both transmitters.
Explanation of terms used in Table 88 and Table 89:
P burst – maximum average transmit power during transmit burst (Watt)
P – maximum average transmit power of the radio (Watt)
G – total transmit gain as a factor, converted from dB
S – power density (Watt/m2)
d – minimum safe separation distance from point source (meters)
Page 4-24
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Compliance with safety standards
Table 87 FCC minimum safe distances – PMP 450m 5.1 GHz, 5.2 GHz, 5.4 GHz and 5.8 GHz
Band
(GHz)
Antenna
PG (W)
S (W/ m2)
d (m)
5.1
90° sector
3.38
10
0.16
5.2
90° sector
0.85
10
0.08
5.4
90° sector
0.85
10
0.08
5.8
90° sector
3.38
10
0.16
Page 4-25
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Compliance with safety standards
Table 88 FCC minimum safe distances – PMP/PTP 450i 900 MHz, 3.65 GHz, 4.9 GHz, 5.1 GHz, 5.2
GHz, 5.4 GHz and 5.8 GHz
P burst
(W)
(W)
(dBi)
(W/ m2)
(m)
0.19
22.75 (13 dBi)
6.0
0.27
90° sector antenna,
integrated
0.316
50.0 (17 dBi)
10.0
0.36
90° sector antenna,
connectorized
0.316
40.0 (16 dBi)
10.0
0.32
Panel, integrated
0.251
79.0 (19 dBi)
10.0
0.40
Omni-directional
0.2138
0.2512
20.0 (13 dBi)
10.0
0.17
90° sector antenna
0.2138
0.2512
50.0 (17 dBi)
10.0
0.26
2ft directional flat plate
0.2138
0.2512
631.0 (28 dBi)
10.0
0.93
4ft directional parabolic
0.851
0.1000
2344.0 (34.9 dBi)
10.0
1.14
6ft directional parabolic
0.1413
0.1659
5248.0 (37.2 dBi)
10.0
2.19
Omni-directional
0.170
0.200
20.0 (13.0 dBi)
10
0.15
90° sector
0.034
0.040
50.1 (17.0 dBi)
10
0.10
2ft directional flat plate
0.002
0.002
707.9 (28.5 dBi)
10
0.09
4ft directional parabolic
0.011
0.013
2818.4 (34.5 dBi)
10
0.44
Omni-directional
0.036
0.042
20.0 (13.0 dBi)
10
0.07
90° sector
0.014
0.017
50.1 (17.0 dBi)
10
0.07
2ft directional flat plate
0.001
0.001
707.9 (28.5 dBi)
10
0.07
4ft directional parabolic
0.000
0.000
2818.4 (34.5 dBi)
10
0.06
Omni-directional
0.036
0.042
20.0 (13.0 dBi)
10
0.07
90° sector
0.014
0.017
50.1 (17.0 dBi)
10
0.07
2ft directional flat plate
0.001
0.001
707.9 (28.5 dBi)
10
0.07
2ft directional parabolic
0.001
0.001
707.9 (28.5 dBi)
10
0.08
Omni-directional
0.24
0.28
20.0 (13 dBi)
10.0
0.18
90° sector
0.10
0.12
50.0 (17 dBi)
10.0
0.18
2ft directional flat plate
0.54
0.63
708.0 (28.5 dBi)
10.0
1.57
4ft directional parabolic
0.54
0.63
3388.0 (35.3 dBi)
10.0
3.43
6ft directional parabolic
0.54
0.63
6457.0 (38.1 dBi)
10.0
4.74
Band
Antenna
900
MHz
Sector antenna
3.65
GHz
4.9
GHz
5.1
GHz
5.2
GHz
5.4
GHz
5.8
GHz
Page 4-26
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Compliance with safety standards
Table 89 ISEDC minimum safe distances – PMP/PTP 450i, 900 MHz, 3.5 GHz, 3.65 GHz, 4.9 GHz, 5.2
GHz, 5.4 GHz, and 5.8 GHz
Band
Antenna
P burst
(W)
(W)
(dBi)
(W/ m2)
(m)
900
MHz
Sector
.02
20.0 (13 dBi)
2.74
0.11
90° sector antenna,
integrated
0.794
50.0 (17 dBi)
37.10
0.29
90° sector antenna,
connectorized
0.794
Panel, integrated
0.794
90° sector antenna,
integrated
0.794
90° sector antenna,
connectorized
0.794
Panel, integrated
0.794
79.0 (19 dBi)
90° sector antenna,
integrated
0.316
50.0 (17 dBi)
90° sector antenna,
connectorized
0.316
40.0 (16 dBi)
Panel, integrated
0.251
79.0 (19 dBi)
7.13
0.47
Omni-directional
0.214
0.251
20.0 (13 dBi)
8.71
0.20
90° sector
0.214
0.251
50.1 (17 dBi)
8.71
0.31
2ft directional flat plate
0.214
0.251
631.0 (28 dBi)
8.71
1.11
6ft directional parabolic
0.141
0.166
5248.0 (37.2 dBi)
8.71
2.60
Omni-directional
0.009
0.011
20.0 (13.0 dBi)
9.13
0.04
90° sector
0.012
0.014
50.1 (17.0 dBi)
9.13
0.06
2ft directional flat plate
0.001
0.001
707.9 (28.5 dBi)
9.13
0.07
2ft directional parabolic
0.001
0.001
707.9 (28.5 dBi)
9.13
0.06
3.5 GHz
3.65
GHz
(Lower
Canada)
3.65
GHz
(Upper
Canada)
4.9 GHz
5.2 GHz
Page 4-27
40.0 (16 dBi)
37.10
0.23
79.0 (19 dBi)
37.10
0.37
50.0 (17 dBi)
7.13
0.67
40.0 (16 dBi)
7.13
7.13
7.13
7.13
0.59
0.84
0.42
0.37
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Band
5.4 GHz
5.8 GHz
Compliance with safety standards
Antenna
P burst
(W)
(W)
(dBi)
(W/ m2)
(m)
Omni-directional
0.036
0.042
20.0 (13.0 dBi)
9.39
0.07
90° sector
0.014
0.017
50.1 (17.0 dBi)
9.39
0.07
2ft directional flat plate
0.001
0.001
707.9 (28.5 dBi)
9.39
0.07
2ft directional parabolic
0.001
0.001
707.9 (28.5 dBi)
9.39
0.06
Omni-directional
0.24
0.28
20.0 (13 dBi)
9.69
0.20
90° sector
0.10
0.12
50.1 (17 dBi)
9.69
0.20
2ft directional flat plate
0.54
0.63
707.9 (28.5 dBi)
9.69
1.67
4ft directional parabolic
0.54
0.63
3388.4 (35.3 dBi)
9.69
4.82
Page 4-28
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Compliance with safety standards
Table 90 FCC minimum safe distances – PMP/PTP 450 900 MHz, 2.4 GHz, 3.65 GHz and 5 GHz
Band
Antenna
P burst
(W)
(dBi)
(W/ m2)
(m)
900 MHz
Yagi
0.032
13 (11 dBi)
0.07
Sector Antenna
0.079
50 (17 dBi)
10
0.18
Integrated
0.158
6 (8 dBi)
10
0.09
Reflector
0.040
100 (20 dBi)
10
0.18
Sector Antenna
0.316
32 (15 dBi)
10
0.28
Integrated
0.316
6 (8 dBi)
10
0.12
Reflector
0.25
100 (20 dBi)
10
0.45
High-gain Ruggedized
0.25
79 (19 dBi)
10
0.40
Sector
0.025
40 (16 dBi)
10
0.09
Integrated
0.126
8 (9 dBi)
10
0.09
Reflector
0.003
316 (25 dBi)
10
0.09
CLIP
0.020
50 (17 dBi)
10
0.09
LENS
0.032
28 (14.5 dBi)
10
0.08
Integrated Dish (450d)
0.0032
316 (25 dBi)
10
0.09
Sector
0.079
40 (16 dBi)
10
0.16
Integrated
0.158
8 (9 dBi)
10
0.10
Reflector
0.158
316 (25 dBi)
10
0.63
CLIP
0.158
50 (17 dBi)
10
0.25
LENS
0.158
28 (14.5 dBi)
10
0.19
Integrated Dish (450d)
0.158
316 (25 dBi)
10
0.63
2.4 GHz
3.65
GHz
5.4 GHz
5.8 GHz
Page 4-29
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Compliance with safety standards
Table 91 ISEDC minimum safe distances – PMP/PTP 450 900 MHz, 2.4 GHz, 3.5/3.65 GHz and 5 GHz
Band
Antenna
P burst
(W)
(dBi)
(W/ m2)
(m)
900 MHz
Yagi
0.316
13 (11 dBi)
2.74
0.35
Sector Antenna
0.079
50 (17 dBi)
5.35
0.24
Integrated
0.158
6 (8 dBi)
5.35
0.12
Reflector
0.040
100 (20 dBi)
5.35
0.24
Sector
0.316
32 (15 dBi)
37.10
0.15
Integrated
0.316
6 (8 dBi)
37.10
0.06
Reflector
0.316
100 (20 dBi)
37.10
0.26
High-gain Ruggedized
0.316
79 (19 dBi)
37.10
0.23
Sector
0.316
32 (15 dBi)
38.20
0.15
Integrated
0.316
6 (8 dBi)
38.20
0.06
Reflector
0.316
100 (20 dBi)
38.20
0.26
High-gain Ruggedized
0.316
79 (19 dBi)
38.20
0.23
Sector
0.316
32 (15 dBi)
38.20
0.14
Integrated
0.316
6 (8 dBi)
38.20
0.06
Reflector
0.20
100 (20 dBi)
38.20
0.20
High-gain Ruggedized
0.003
79 (19 dBi)
38.20
0.23
Sector
0.025
40 (16 dBi)
9.39
0.09
Integrated
0.126
8 (9 dBi)
9.39
0.09
Reflector
0.003
316 (25 dBi)
9.39
0.09
CLIP
0.020
50 (17 dBi)
9.39
0.09
LENS
0.032
28 (14.5 dBi)
9.39
0.09
Integrated Dish (450d)
0.0032
316 (25 dBi)
9.39
0.09
Sector
.079
40 (16 dBi)
9.69
0.16
Integrated
0.158
8 (9 dBi)
9.69
0.10
Reflector
0.158
316 (25 dBi)
9.69
0.064
CLIP
0.158
50 (17 dBi)
9.69
0.25
LENS
0.158
28 (14.5 dBi)
9.69
0.19
Integrated Dish (450d)
0.158
316 (25 dBi)
9.69
0.64
2.4 GHz
3.5 GHz
3.65
GHz
(lower
Canada)
3.65
GHz
(upper
Canada)
5.4 GHz
5.8 GHz
Page 4-30
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Compliance with safety standards
(*1) P: maximum average transmit power capability of the radio including cable loss (Watt)
Capacité de puissance d'émission moyenne maximale de la radio comprenant la perte dans les
câble de connexion (W)
(*2) G: total transmit gain as a factor, converted from dB
Gain total d'émission, converti à partir de la valeur en dB
(*3) S: power density (W/m2)
Densité de puissance (W/m2)
(*4) d: minimum distance from point source (meters)
Distance minimale de source ponctuelle (en mètres)
Page 4-31
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Compliance with safety standards
Note
Gain of antenna in dBi = 10 * log(G).
The regulations require that the power used for the calculations is the maximum power in the
transmit burst subject to allowance for source-based time-averaging.
At 5.4 GHz and EU 5.8 GHz, the products are generally limited to a fixed EIRP which can be
achieved with the Integrated Antenna. The calculations above assume that the maximum
EIRP allowed by the regulations is being transmitted.
Remarque
Gain de l'antenne en dBi = 10 * log(G).
Les règlements exigent que la puissance utilisée pour les calculs soit la puissance maximale
de la rafale de transmission soumis à une réduction pour prendre en compte le rapport
cyclique pour les signaux modulés dans le temps.
Pour une opération dans la CEE dans les bandes 5,4 GHz et 5,8 GHz, les produits sont
généralement limités à une PIRE qui peut être atteinte avec l'antenne intégrée. Les calculs
ci-dessus supposent que la PIRE maximale autorisée par la réglementation est atteinte.
Note
If there are no EIRP limits in the country of deployment, use the distance calculations for
FCC 5.8 GHz for all frequency bands.
At FCC 5.8 GHz, for antennas between 0.6m (2ft) and 1.8m (6ft), alter the distance
proportionally to the antenna gain.
Remarque
Si aucune limite de PIRE existe pour le pays de déploiement, utilisez les calculs de distance
pour FCC 5,8 GHz pour toutes les bandes de fréquence.
Pour la band FCC 5,8 GHz et les antennes entre 0,6 m (2 pieds) et 1,8 m (6 pieds), modifier
la distance proportionnellement au gain de l'antenne.
Hazardous location compliance
The PMP/PTP 450i series ATEX/HAZLOC ODUs have been certified for operation in the following
hazardous locations:
ATEX
The products have been approved under an “Intrinsic Safety” assessment as defined in EN6007911:2007.
The approval is given by certificate number TRAC09ATEX31224X, issued by TRaC Global, with the
specific level of coverage shown below:

II 3 G Ex ic IIC T4

II - Equipment group (surface applications)

3 - Equipment category (infrequent exposure)
Page 4-32
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Compliance with safety standards

G - Atmosphere (Gas)

ic - Protection concept (intrinsic safety)

IIC - Gas group (up to and including Hydrogen and Acetylene)

T4 - Temperature class (135°C)
Page 4-33
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Compliance with radio regulations
Compliance with radio regulations
This section describes how the 450 Platform Family complies with the radio regulations that are in force in
various countries.
Caution
Where necessary, the end user is responsible for obtaining any National licenses required to
operate this product and these must be obtained before using the product in any particular
country. Contact the appropriate national administrations for details of the conditions of use
for the bands in question and any exceptions that might apply.
Caution
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Cambium Networks could void the
user’s authority to operate the system.
Caution
For the connectorized version of the product and in order to reduce potential radio
interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the
Effective Isotropically Radiated Power (EIRP) is not more than that permitted for successful
communication.
Attention
Le cas échéant, l'utilisateur final est responsable de l'obtention des licences nationales
nécessaires pour faire fonctionner ce produit. Celles-ci doivent être obtenus avant d'utiliser
le produit dans un pays particulier. Contactez les administrations nationales concernées
pour les détails des conditions d'utilisation des bandes en question, et toutes les exceptions
qui pourraient s'appliquer
Attention
Les changements ou modifications non expressément approuvés par les réseaux de
Cambium pourraient annuler l'autorité de l'utilisateur à faire fonctionner le système.
Attention
Pour la version du produit avec une antenne externe, et afin de réduire le risque
d'interférence avec d'autres utilisateurs, le type d'antenne et son gain doivent être choisis
afin que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (PIRE) ne soit pas supérieure au
minimum nécessaire pour établir une liaison de la qualité requise.
Page 4-34
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Compliance with radio regulations
Type approvals
This system has achieved Type Approval in various countries around the world. This means that the
system has been tested against various local technical regulations and found to comply. The frequency
bands in which the system operates may be ‘unlicensed’ and, in these bands, the system can be used
provided it does not cause interference. The system is not guaranteed protection against interference
from other products and installations.
The radio specification type approvals that have been granted for 450 Platform Family frequency variants
are listed under Table 92.
Table 92 Radio certifications
Region/Country
Band
Specification
Brazil
4.9 GHz
ANATEL, RESOLUÇÃO Nº 633, DE 14 DE MARÇO DE 2014
5.4 GHz
ANATEL, RESOLUTION No. 506, FROM JULY 1, 2008
5.8 GHz
ANATEL, RESOLUTION No. 506, FROM JULY 1, 2008
900 MHz
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
4.9 GHz
Protocol Between the UNITED STATES OF AMERICA and
MEXICO – Use of 4940 to 4990 MHz band.
5.4 GHz
Acuerdo del 27 de noviembre de 2012
5.8 GHz
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
900 MHz
FCC Part 15.247
2.4 GHz
FCC Part 15 Class B
3.6 GHz
FCC Part 15 Class B
4.9 GHz
FCC 47 CFR Part 90
5.1 GHz
FCC 47 CFR Part 15 E
5.2 GHz
FCC 47 CFR Part 15 E
5.4 GHz
FCC 47 CFR Part 15 E
5.8 GHz
FCC 47 CFR Part 15 C
900 MHz
RSS Gen and RSS 210
2.4 GHz
RSS Gen and RSS 210
3.5 /3.6 GHz
RSS Gen and RSS 192
4.9 GHz
IC RSS-111, Issue 5
5.8 GHz
IC RSS-247, Issue 1
3.5 GHz
ETSI EN 302 326-2 V1.2.2
Mexico
USA
Canada
Europe
Page 4-35
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Compliance with radio regulations
4.9 GHz
ETSI EN302 625; V1.1.1 Broadband Disaster Relief
5.4 GHz
ETSI EN 301 893 V1.8.1
5.8 GHz
ETSI EN 302 502 V2.1.1
Brazil specific information
Brazil notification
For compliant operation in the 5.4 GHz band, the Equivalent Isotropic Radiated Power from the integrated
antenna or connectorized antenna shall not exceed 30 dBm (0.5 W).
The operator is responsible for enabling the DFS feature on any Canopy 5.4 GHz radio by setting the
Country Code to “Brazil”, including after the module is reset to factory defaults.
Important Note: This equipment operates as a secondary application, so it has no rights against harmful
interference, even if generated by similar equipment, and cannot cause harmful interference on systems
operating as primary applications.
Brazil certification numbers
The Anatel certification number for Brazil for the PMP/PTP 450i Series is 2426-15-7745.
Australia Notification
900 MHz modules must be set to transmit and receive only on center channels of 920, 922, or 923 MHz
so as to stay within the ACMA approved band of 915 MHz to 928 MHz for the class license and not
interfere with other approved users.
After taking into account antenna gain (in dBi), 900 MHz modules’ transmitter output power (in dBm) must
be set to stay within the legal regulatory limit of 30 dBm (1 W) EIRP for this 900 MHz frequency band.
Regulatory Requirements for CEPT Member States
(www.cept.org)
When operated in accordance with the instructions for use, Cambium Wireless equipment operating in
the 5.1 GHz and 5.4 GHz bands is compliant with CEPT Resolution 229 (REV. WRC-12).
Operating the 450 Platform Family in the bands 5150 to 5350 MHz and 5470 to 5725 MHz is granted
providing it is not causing interference to the existing primary services allocated to those bands.
For compliant operation in the 5250 to 5350 MHz band, the transmit power from the integrated antenna or
a connectorized antenna shall be limited to a maximum mean EIRP of 200 mW and a maximum mean
EIRP density of 10 mW/MHz in any 1 MHz band.
For compliant operation in the 5470 to 5725 MHz band, the transmit power shall be restricted to a
maximum of 250 mW with a maximum mean EIRP of 1 W and a maximum mean EIRP density of 50
mW/MHz in any 1 MHz band.
Page 4-36
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Compliance with radio regulations
For compliant operation in the bands 5 250-5 350 MHz and 5 470-5 725 MHz, the 450 Platform Family
employs transmitter power control.
For EU member states, RLAN equipment in the 5.4GHz bands is exempt from individual licensing under
Commission Recommendation 2003/203/EC. Contact the appropriate national administrations for details
on the conditions of use for the bands in question and any exceptions that might apply. Also see
www.ero.dk for further information.
Cambium Radio equipment operating in the 5470 to 5725 MHz band are categorized as “Class 1” devices
within the EU in accordance with ECC DEC(04)08 and are “CE” marked
to show
compliance with the European Radio & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) directive
1999/5/EC. The relevant Declaration of Conformity can be found at
http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/ec_doc/ .
A European Commission decision, implemented by Member States on 31 October 2005, makes the
frequency band 5470-5725 MHz available in all EU Member States for wireless access systems. Under
this decision, the designation of Canopy 5.4GHz products become “Class 1 devices” and these do not
require notification under article 6, section 4 of the R&TTE Directive. Consequently, these 5.4GHz
products are only marked with the
symbol and may be used in any member state.
Page 4-37
Chapter 5:
Preparing for installation
This chapter describes how to stage and test the hardware for a 450 Platform network. This chapter is
arranged as follows:

Safety on page 5-2: Describes the precautions to be observed and checks to be performed before
proceeding with the installation

Preparing for installation on page 5-5: Describes the pre-configuration procedure before proceed with
installation.

Testing system components on page 5-7: Describes the procedures for unpacking and performing
and initial staging of the 450 Platform Family ODU.

Configuring Link for Test on page 5-16: Describes the procedures for testing the equipment’s radio
links.
Page 5-1
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Safety
Safety
Warning
To prevent loss of life or physical injury, observe the following safety guidelines. In no event
shall Cambium Networks be liable for any injury or damage caused during the installation of
the Cambium 450 Platform Family. Ensure that only qualified personnel install a 450
Platform link.
Hazardous locations
Warning
When installing the PMP/PTP 450i ATEX/HAZLOC product variants in hazardous locations,
follow the instructions contained in the PMP/PTP 450i Series Hazardous Location Guide
(supplied in box with the products), in addition to the instructions in this user guide.
Power lines
Exercise extreme care when working near power lines.
Working at heights
Exercise extreme care when working at heights.
Power supply
Always use one of the Cambium 450 Platform Family power supply units (PSU) to power the ODU.
Failure to use a Cambium supplied PoE could result in equipment damage and will invalidate the safety
certification and may cause a safety hazard.
Grounding and protective earth
The Outdoor Unit (ODU) must be properly grounded to protect against lightning. It is the user’s
responsibility to install the equipment in accordance with national regulations. In the USA follow the
requirements of the National Electrical code NFPA 70-2005 and 780-2004 Installation of Lightning
Protection Systems. In Canada, follow Section 54 of the Canadian Electrical Code. These codes describe
correct installation procedures for grounding the outdoor unit, mast, lead-in wire and discharge unit, size
of grounding conductors and connection requirements for grounding electrodes. Other regulations may
apply in different countries and therefore it is recommended that installation of the outdoor unit be
contracted to a professional installer.
Page 5-2
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Safety
Powering down before servicing
Always power down and unplug the equipment before servicing.
Primary disconnect device
The ODU power supply is the primary disconnect device.
External cables
Safety may be compromised if outdoor rated cables are not used for connections that will be exposed to
the outdoor environment. For outdoor copper Cat5e Ethernet interfaces, always use Cat5e cable that is
gel-filled and shielded with copper-plated steel.
RF exposure near the antenna
Strong radio frequency (RF) fields will be present close to the antenna when the transmitter is on. Always
turn off the power to the ODU before undertaking maintenance activities in front of the antenna.
Minimum separation distances
Ensure that personnel are not exposed to unsafe levels of RF energy. The units start to radiate RF
energy as soon as they are powered up. Never work in front of the antenna when the ODU is powered.
Install the ODUs so as to provide and maintain the minimum separation distances from all persons. For
minimum separation distances, see Calculated distances and power compliance margins on page 4-24.
Grounding and lightning protection requirements
Ensure that the installation meets the requirements defined in Grounding and lightning protection on page
3-8.
Grounding cable installation methods
To provide effective protection against lightning induced surges, observe these requirements:

Grounding conductor runs are as short, straight and smooth as possible, with bends and curves kept
to a minimum.

Grounding cables must not be installed with drip loops.
Page 5-3
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Safety

All bends must have a minimum radius of 200 mm (8 in) and a minimum angle of 90°. A diagonal run
is preferable to a bend, even though it does not follow the contour or run parallel to the supporting
structure.

All bends, curves and connections must be routed towards the grounding electrode system, ground
rod, or ground bar.

Grounding conductors must be securely fastened.

Braided grounding conductors must not be used.

Approved bonding techniques must be used for the connection of dissimilar metals.
Siting ODUs and antennas
ODUs, external antennas and GPS receivers are not designed to survive direct lightning strikes. For this
reason they must be installed in Zone B as defined in Lightning protection zones on page 3-9. Mounting
in Zone A may put equipment, structures and life at risk.
Thermal Safety
The ODU enclosure may be hot to the touch when in operation. The ODU must not be operated in
ambient temperatures exceeding 40°C unless mounted in a Restricted Access Location. For more
information, see ODU ambient temperature limits on page 3-10.
Warning
Do not install the ODU in a location where the ambient temperature could exceed 40°C
unless this is a Restricted Access Location as defined by EN 60950-1.
Alerte
L’unité externe ne doit pas être installée dans un endroit où la température ambiante est
supérieure à 40C à moins que l’accès soit limité au personnel autorisé.
Page 5-4
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Preparing for installation
Preparing for installation
ODU pre-configuration
It is common practice to pre-configure the units during staging before site installation by performing the
following tasks:

Connecting to the unit

Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces

Upgrading the software version and using CNUT

General configuration

Configuring security

Configuring radio parameters

Setting up SNMP agent

Configuring syslog

Configuring remote access

Monitoring the Link

Configuring quality of service

Zero Touch Configuration Using DHCP Option 66

Configuring Radio via config file

Configuring a RADIUS server
If the units are to be pre-configured during staging, the safety precautions below MUST be observed.
Preparing personnel
In no event shall Cambium Networks be liable for any injury or damage caused during the installation of
the Cambium 450 Platform Family ODU.
Ensure that only qualified personnel undertake the installation of a 450 Platform system.
Ensure that all safety precautions are observed.
Preparing inventory
Perform the following inventory checks:

Check that the correct components are available, as described in Ordering the components on page
2-60.

Check the contents of all packages against their packing lists.
Page 5-5
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Preparing for installation
Preparing tools
Check that following specific tools are available, in addition to general tools:

RJ45 crimp tool (it must be the correct tool for the type of RJ45 being used).

Personal Computer (PC) with 10 or 100 or 1000 BaseT Ethernet port

Web browser

Ethernet patch cables
Page 5-6
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Testing system components
Testing system components
The best practice is to connect all components—AP/BHM, SMs/BHS, GPS antenna (if applicable) and
CMM (if applicable)—in a test setting and initially configure and verify them before deploying them to an
installation. In this way, any configuration issues are worked out before going on-site, on a tower, in the
weather, where the discovery of configuration issues or marginal hardware is more problematic and workflow affecting.
Unpacking Components
When a delivery arrives, inspect all packages immediately for damages.
Carefully unpack the equipment, verify that all the components have arrived as per order and are in good
condition. Save all packaging materials for equipment transportation to the installation site.
Preparing the ODU
After the equipment is unpacked, the units may be configured for staging tests.
Use either of two methods to configure an AP/BHM:

Use the Quick Start feature of the product (via GUI menu Quick Start)

Manually set each parameter
After changing configuration parameters on a GUI web page:

Before you leave a web page, click the Save button to save the change(s)

After making change(s) on multiple web pages, click the Reboot button to reboot the module and
implement the change(s)
Configuring the Computing Device for Test
If the computer is configured for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), disconnect the computer
from the network. If the computer is instead configured for static IP addressing

Set the static address in the 169.254 network

Set the subnet mask to 255.255.0.0.
For detailed instructions, see section Configuring the management PC on page 5-16.
Page 5-7
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Testing system components
Factory default Configuration
From the factory, the APs/BHMs and SMs/BHSs are all configured to not transmit on any frequency. This
configuration ensures that equipment operators do not accidentally turn on an unsynchronized module.
Site synchronization of modules is required because


modules:
cannot transmit and receive signals at the same time.
use TDD (Time Division Duplexing) to distribute signal access of the downlink and uplink frames.
when one module transmits while an unintended module nearby receives signal, the transmitting
module may interfere with or desense the receiving module. In this context, interference is selfinterference (within the same network).
ODU interfaces
See section 450 Platform Family interfaces on page 2-7
ODU diagnostic LEDs
See section AP/BHM LEDs on page 2-15.
See section SM/BHS LEDs on page 2-17.
Recommended Tools for Installation
The following tools may be needed for installation:
Table 93 Tools for PMP and PTP 450 Platform ODU installation
Equipment to Be
Installed
Tools Required
AP or BHM

3 mm Allen Wrench
Used for connecting the antenna mating bracket to the rear of the AP housing

Crescent Wrench Pair
Used for tightening cable glands

Self-amalgamating and PVC Tape
Used for weatherproofing N-type connections
AP or BHM or BHS
Antenna

13 mm Spanner Wrench (or Ratchet Spanner Wrench) Pair
Used for connecting the antenna (sector or omni for AP, or directional for
BH)base to the pole/mast mounting bracket

Self-amalgamating and PVC Tape
Used for weatherproofing N-type connections

N-type Torque Wrench (not required but recommended)
Used for assuring proper tightening of N-type connectors terminating the RF
cables
Page 5-8
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Equipment to Be
Installed
Tools Required
SM

Testing system components
Wrench/driver (depending on operator’s choice of clamps)
Used for tightening clamps to the pole

Alignment tone adapter / headset
Used for aligning the SM to the AP
Universal Global
Positioning System

Philips Screwdriver
Used for attaching the UGPS unit to the pole/mast mounting bracket

13mm Spanner Wrench (or Ratchet Spanner Wrench)
Used for connecting the mounting bracket’s U-bolt to the antenna or mast
Cabling

Electrician’s Scissors or Wire Cutters
Used for cutting wire to length

RJ-11/RJ-45 Crimping Tool
Used for stripping RJ-11/RJ-45 cables and for terminating cable ends

Cable Testing Device
Used to ensure that cables are properly constructed
Standards for Wiring
Modules automatically sense whether the Ethernet cable in a connection is wired as straight-through or
crossover. Operators may use either straight-through or crossover cable to connect a network interface
card (NIC), hub, router, or switch to these modules. This guide follows the EIA/TIA-568B colour code
standard.
Page 5-9
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Testing system components
Best Practices for Cabling
The following practices are essential to the reliability and longevity of cabled connections:

Use only shielded cables to resist interference.

For vertical runs, provide cable support and strain relief.

Include a 2-ft (0.6-m) service loop on each end of the cable to allow for thermal expansion and
contraction and to facilitate terminating the cable again when needed.

Include a drip loop to shed water so that most of the water does not reach the connector at the
device.

Properly crimp all connectors.

Use dielectric grease on all connectors to resist corrosion.

Use only shielded connectors to resist interference and corrosion.
Wiring Connectors
The following diagrams correlate pins to wire colors and illustrate crossovers where applicable.
Pin 1, relative to the lock tab on the connector of a straight-through cable is located as shown below.
Figure 64 Pin 1 location
Page 5-10
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Testing system components
Main port pinout
Table 94 Main port pinout
RJ45 pin
Description
+TxRx0
–TxRx0
+TxRx1
+TxRx2
–TxRx2
–TxRx1
+TxRx3
–TxRx3
Aux port pinout
Table 95 Aux port pinout
RJ45 pin
Description
+TxRx0
–TxRx0
+TxRx1
GPS power out, Alignment tone out, GPS data out
GPS data in
–TxRx1
GPS 0v
GPS Sync in
Page 5-11
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Testing system components
RJ-45 Pinout for Straight-through Ethernet Cable
Figure 65 Straight-through Ethernet Cable
RJ45 Connector (Bottom)
Straight-Through Cable
RJ45 Connector (Top)
``
Table 96 RJ-45 pinout for straight-through Ethernet cable
Pin
Signal
Pair
Color
TP1+
White/orange stripe
TP1-
Orange solid
TP2+
White/green stripe
TP3+
Blue solid
TP3-
White/blue stripe
TP2-
Green solid
TP4+
White/brown stripe
TP4-
Brown solid
RJ-45 Pinout for Crossover Ethernet Cable
Hook Underneath
Crossover Cable
Hook On Top
UTP Category 5/6 Cable
Page 5-12
Hook
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Testing system components
Table 97 RJ-45 pinout for crossover Ethernet cable
Connection 1
Connection 2
Pin
Signal
Pair
Color
Signal
Pair
Color
TP1+
White/orange stripe
TP2+
White/green stripe
TP1-
Orange solid
TP2-
Green solid
TP2+
White/green stripe
TP1+
White/orange stripe
TP3+
White/blue stripe
TP4+
White/brown stripe
TP3-
Blue solid
TP4-
Brown solid
TP2-
Green solid
TP1-
Orange solid
TP4+
White/brown stripe
TP3+
Blue solid
TP4-
Brown solid
TP3-
White/blue stripe
Page 5-13
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Testing system components
AP/BHM to UGPS cable
The AP/BHM to UGPS cable can be constructed from RJ12 to RJ 45 cable using the pin configuration
described in Table 98.
Note
This is only applicable for 450 AP/BHM.
The AP/BHM will only power up the UGPS if it configured to do so.
Figure 66 AP/BHM to UGPS cable
Straight-Through Cable
RJ45 Connector (Bottom)
RJ12 Connector (Top)
NC
``
NC
Table 98 AP/BHM to UGPS cable pinout
Pin
450i Series AP RJ 45
Connector
Pin
UGPS RJ 12 Connector
NC
8 on RJ 45
NC
NC
NC
5 on RJ 45
4 on RJ 12
4 on RJ 45
3 on RJ 12
NC
NC
7 on RJ 45
6 on RJ 12
1 on RJ 12
Page 5-14
Connector
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Testing system components
Alignment tone cable (for PMP/PTP 450i)
The alignment tone cable is constructed using RJ45 plug and Stereo plug. The pin configuration is shown
in Figure 67
Figure 67 Alignment tone cable pin configuration
Resistors
Pin 7
#8
#1
Pin 4
Left
220 Ω
Right
220 Ω
Common
For more information, refer Aux port to alignment tone headset wiring.
Override plug cable (for PMP 450 only)
To construct an override plug, perform the following steps:

Crimp an RJ-12 6 pin connector onto a 6 inch length of CAT 5 cable

Pin out all 6 pins

Short (solder together) pins 4 and 6 on the other end. Do not connect any other wires to anything.
Figure 68 RJ-12 pinout for the default plug
RJ12 Connector (Bottom)
Override plug cable wiring
Not used
Not used
``
Not used
Page 5-15
Tie together
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Configuring Link for Test
Configuring Link for Test
It is important to stage the AP/BHM and SM/BHS units first to verify proper registration before deploying
the modules to the site. To begin configuring the modules for test, see the sections below:
Configuring the management PC
To configure the local management PC to communicate with the AP, SM, BHM or BHS, proceed as
follows:
Powering the AP/SM/BH for test configuration
Perform the following steps to power on the ODU.
Procedure 2 Powering the ODU
Plug one end of a CAT 5 Ethernet cable into the ODU.
Plug the Ethernet cable connector labeled To Radio into the jack in the pig tail that hangs
from the power supply.
Plug the other connector of the pig tail (this connector labeled To Computer) into the
Ethernet jack of the computing device.
Plug the power supply into an electrical outlet.
Warning
From this point until you remove power from the ODU, stay at least as far
from the AP as the minimum separation distance specified in Minimum
separation distances on page 5-3.
Power up the computing device
Start the browser in the computing device
The AP/BHM interface provides a series of web pages to configure and monitor the unit. Access webbased interface through a computing device that is either directly connected or connected through a
network to the AP/BHM. If the computing device is not connected to a network when it is being configured
for test environment, and if the computer has used a proxy server address and port to configure a
module, then the operator may need to first disable the proxy setting in the computer.
Page 5-16
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Configuring Link for Test
Perform the following procedure to toggle the computer to not use the proxy setting.
Procedure 3 Bypassing browser proxy settings to access module web pages
Launch Microsoft Internet Explorer
Select Tools, Internet Options, Connections, LAN Settings. Alternate web browser
menu selections may differ.
Uncheck the Use a proxy server box.
In the address bar of your browser, enter the IP address of the AP/BHM. (For example, enter
http://169.254.1.1 to access the AP/BHM through its default IP address). The AP/BHM responds
by opening the General Status tab of its Home page.
Logging into the web interface – AP/SM/BH
Procedure 4 Logging into the web interface
Plug one end of a CAT 5 Ethernet cable into the AP/BHM
Plug the Ethernet cable connector labeled To Radio into the jack in the pig tail that hangs
from the power supply.
Plug the other connector of the pig tail (this connector labeled To Computer) into the
Ethernet jack of the computing device.
Plug the power supply into an electrical outlet.
Warning
From this point until you remove power from the ODU, stay at least as far
from the ODU as the minimum separation distance specified in Minimum
separation distances on page 5-3.
Using the Quick Start Configuration Wizard of the
AP/BHM
See section Quick link setup on page 7-11.
Page 5-17
Chapter 6:
Installation
This chapter describes how to install and test the hardware for a 450 Platform link. It contains the
following topics:

ODU variants and mounting bracket options on page 6-2 provides details of six different bracket
options, including the type of ODU and range of pole diameters supported by each option.

Mount the ODU, LPU and surge suppressor on page 6-3 describes how to mount and ground an
integrated or connectorized ODU, how to mount and ground the top LPU.

Installing the copper Cat5e Ethernet interface on page 6-19 describes how to install the copper Cat5e
power over Ethernet interface from the ODU to the PSU.

Installing external antennas to a connectorized ODU on page 6-23 describes how to install external
antennas for a connectorized ODU.

Installing ODU on page 6-59 describes how to install PTP and PMP ODU radios.

Installing the AC Power Injector on page 6-63 describes how to install a power supply unit for the
PMP/PTP 450 platform, either the AC Power Injector.

Supplemental installation information on page 6-65 contains detailed installation procedures that are
not included in the above topics, such as how to strip cables, create grounding points and
weatherproof connectors.
Note
These instructions assume that LPUs are being installed from the 450 Platform Family LPU
and grounding kit (Cambium part number C000065L007). If the installation does not require
LPUs, adapt these instructions as appropriate.
If LPUs are being installed, only use the five black-capped EMC cable glands supplied in the
LPU and grounding kit. The silver-capped cable glands supplied in the ODU kits must only
be used in 450 Platform installations which do not require LPUs.
Page 6-1
Chapter 6: Installation
ODU variants and mounting bracket options
ODU variants and mounting bracket options
Mounting bracket– PMP/PTP 450i Series
The PMP/PTP 450i Series supports below mentioned mounting bracket option:
Table 99 PMP/PTP 450i Series - ODU mounting bracket part numbers
Cambium description
Cambium part number
Mounting bracket – low profile adjustable
N000045L002A
The low profile bracket provides elevation adjustment with the PMP/PTP 450i Series Integrated ODUs of
+10° to –5° or +5° to –10°. A larger adjustment range is available using the standard integrated mounting
bracket. The connectorized mounting bracket does not provide elevation adjustment.
Mounting bracket– PMP 450 Series – SM 900 MHz
The PMP 450i Series – SM 900 MHz has special mounting bracket option. The PMP 450i Series AP - 900
MHz mounting procedure is the same as the other 450i Series radios. The 450 Series SM 900 MHz has a
different mounting bracket which is supplied along with Yagi antenna.
Page 6-2
Chapter 6: Installation
Mount the ODU, LPU and surge suppressor
Mount the ODU, LPU and surge suppressor
To install the ODU and top LPU, use the following procedures:

Attach ground cables to the ODU on page 6-3

Mount the ODU on the mast on page 6-6

Mount the top LPU on page 6-10

Mount the Surge Suppressor on page 6-10
Attach ground cables to the ODU
PMP 450m Series – AP
Fasten an AWG 10 (or 6mm2) copper ground
cable to each ODU grounding point using the M6
(small) lugs.
Secure the M6 grounding bolts by applying 3 Nm
torque..
Securely connect the copper wires to the
grounding system (Protective Earth) and the LPU
or Gigabit Ethernet Surge Suppressor according to
applicable regulations.
Page 6-3
Chapter 6: Installation
Mount the ODU, LPU and surge suppressor
PMP/PTP 450i Series – AP/SM/BH, PMP 450 3GHz
Ruggedized SM
Fasten an AWG 10 (or 6mm2) copper ground
cable to each ODU grounding point using the M6
(small) lugs.
Tighten the Ground post screws.
Securely connect the copper wires to the grounding system (Protective Earth) and the LPU or Gigabit
Ethernet Surge Suppressor according to applicable regulations.
Page 6-4
Chapter 6: Installation
Mount the ODU, LPU and surge suppressor
PMP 450 AP
Fasten an AWG 10 (or 6mm2) copper ground
cable to each ODU grounding point using the M6
(small) lugs
Tighten the Ground post locking nut in the copper
wire
Securely connect the copper wire to the grounding system (Protective Earth) according to applicable
regulations.
PMP 450 SM
Fasten an AWG 10 (or 6mm2) copper ground
cable to each ODU grounding point using the M6
(small) lugs
Tighten the Ground post locking nut in the copper
wire
Page 6-5
Chapter 6: Installation
Mount the ODU, LPU and surge suppressor
Securely connect the copper wire to the grounding system (Protective Earth) according to applicable
regulations.
The grounding point on PMP 450 Series SM 900 MHz is different from 2.4, 3.5/3.65 and 5 GHz PMP 450
SMs as shown in Figure 69.
Figure 69 PMP 450 900 MHz SM grounding
Mount the ODU on the mast
PMP 450m Series – AP
See - PMP 450m Series – AP on page 6-52 for Installation
for an integrated ODU
Remove the rear bracket strap from upper and lower
brackets of ODU
Attach the upper and lower bracket of ODU to the mount
point by closing the rear strap around the pole
Secure the four serrated flange M8 nuts by applying 10
Nm torque on upper and lower rear strap using a 13 mm
spanner wrench. These must be tightened evenly on the
pole to avoid jumping/stripping threads
Secure the bolts on four sides by applying 8 Nm torque as
per the angle of the antenna.
Page 6-6
Chapter 6: Installation
Mount the ODU, LPU and surge suppressor
PMP/PTP 450i Series – AP/SM/BH, PMP 450 3 GHz
Ruggedized SM
Caution
Do not reverse the bracket clamp, as this arrangement may lead to failure of the assembly.
Do not over-tighten the bolts as this may lead to failure of the assembly.
Fix the mounting plate to the back of the ODU using the
four bolts, and spring and plain washers provided. Tighten
the bolts.
Attach the bracket body to the mounting plate using the
M8 bolt, spring and plain washers.
Hoist the ODU to the mounting position
Attach the bracket body to the pole using the bracket
clamp, M8 bolts, and spring and plain washers.
Adjust the elevation and azimuth to achieve visual
alignment.
PMP 450b SM
Use a stainless steel hose clamp for the attachment.
Attach the mounting bracket to the structure with the
release tab facing downward. Tighten the hose clamp.
Slide the 450b SM onto the mounting bracket. Press
downwards until it clicks into place.
Loosen the adjuster wingnut on the bracket and set the
required SM tilt angle. Retighten the adjuster wingnut by
hand to secure the SM at the chosen angle.
Page 6-7
Chapter 6: Installation
Mount the ODU, LPU and surge suppressor
PMP 450 AP
Using an 8mm nut driver, attach the pole mount’s AP
housing bracket to the unit using the 4 M5 x 16mm
bolts included with the AP.
Using the included (depending on pole diameter):

M8 x 70mm hex cap bolts ( 2 quantity)
or

M8 x 40mm hex cap bolts ( 2 quantity)
and

M8 flat washers ( 2 quantity)

M8 coil washers ( 2 quantity)
Attach the mounting bracket to the pole/mast. The
mounting bracket is designed to attach to poles with
diameters in the range of 2 in. (50mm) to 3in.
(75mm).
Complete the AP mounting assembly by attaching the
included:

8mm hex cap bolt ( one quantity)
Through the AP’s attached mounting bracket and
pole mount. At this time the AP may be adjusted to
the desired position and tightened with a 1/2 inch
spanner wrench to 11 lb/ft (14Nm).
Page 6-8
Chapter 6: Installation
Mount the ODU, LPU and surge suppressor
PMP 450 SM (except PMP 450 SM - 900 MHz)
Use stainless steel hose clamps for the attachment.
Stainless steel
hose clamps
Attach the mounting bracket to the structure.
Tighten the locking nut.
Reflector dish arm
PMP 450 SM 900 MHz (connectorized)
The PMP 450 900 MHz connectorized SM mounting procedure is different from other radios. It does not
get directly mounted on pole.
Align the 900 MHz SM to E bracket of
Yagi antenna
Slide the radio towards right to lock
on the antenna
Slide towards right to lock
Page 6-9
Chapter 6: Installation
Mount the ODU, LPU and surge suppressor
Mount the top LPU
1 For separate LPU mounting, use the U-bolt bracket
from the LPU kit to mount the top LPU on the pole
below the ODU. Tighten to a torque setting of 7.0
Nm (5.2 lb ft).
Please refer Gigabit LPU and Grounding Kit
Installation Guide for more details.
Mount the Surge Suppressor
PMP/PTP 450i/450b Series
Gigabit Ethernet Surge Suppressors are installed at both ends of the drop cable. One within 600 mm
(24”) of and under the ODU. The other located within 600 mm (24”) of the building entry point.
Quick procedure:
The quick procedure for the Surge Suppressor for PMP/PTP 450i/450b Series mounting is as follows:
Ground using the terminal on the back of the units.
Use the supplied Tubular Lug and 6 mm2 (10 AWG)
stranded cable, max length 600 mm (24”).
I.
Waterproof the cable lug with heat
shrink sleeving.
II.
Secure the Cable assembly to the unit using the
supplied screw and washer.
Mount the Gigabit Ethernet Surge Suppressor on the
wall or pole
Page 6-10
Chapter 6: Installation
Mount the ODU, LPU and surge suppressor
Connect the two CAT5e cables to the Gigabit
Ethernet Surge Suppressor
Slide the end cap over the bottom of the Gigabit
Ethernet Surge Suppressor, ensuring it clicks firmly in
place
Refer to the Gigabit Ethernet Surge Suppressor Installation Guide for more details.
Figure 70 Gigabit Etherner Surge Suppressor
Page 6-11
Chapter 6: Installation
Mount the ODU, LPU and surge suppressor
PMP/PTP 450 Series
The PMP/PTP 450 Series uses 600SSH Surge Suppressor. The inside of the surge suppressor is shown
in Figure 71.
Caution
The PMP 450 SM 900 MHz is based off of the 450 Series, be sure to use a 600SS to protect
this radio type.
Figure 71 600SSH Surge Suppressor – inside
Key to Callouts 600SSH
Holes—for mounting the Surge Suppressor
to a flat surface (such as an outside wall).
The distance between centers is 4.25 inches
(108 mm).
RJ-45 connectors—One side (neither side is
better than the other for this purpose)
connects to the product (AP, SM, AC
Adapter, or cluster management module).
The other connects to the drop cable.
Ground post and washer—use heavy gauge
(10 AWG or 6 mm2) copper wire for
connection. Refer to local electrical codes for
exact specifications.
Ground Cable Opening—route the 10 AWG
(6 mm2) ground cable through this opening.
CAT-5 Cable Knockouts—route the two CAT5 cables through these openings, or
alternatively through the Conduit Knockouts.
Conduit Knockouts—on the back of the case,
near the bottom. Available for installations
where cable is routed through building
conduit.
Note
The 600SSH surge suppressor is shipped in the “isolated” position (pin 4 isolated by 68V
from protective earth). If packet error issues occur over the Ethernet link (verify by pinging
the device through the 600SSH), configure the 600SSH to “grounded” position (by moving
the 600SSH switch from “isolated” to “ground”) to avoid ground loops that may be present in
the system.
The mounting procedure for the Surge Suppressor for PMP/PTP 450 Series is as follows:
Remove the cover of the 600SSH Surge Suppressor.
Page 6-12
Chapter 6: Installation
Mount the ODU, LPU and surge suppressor
With the cable openings facing downward, mount the 600SSH to the outside of the subscriber
premises, as close to the point where the Ethernet cable penetrates the residence or building as
possible, and as close to the grounding system (Protective Earth) as possible.
Wrap an AWG 10 (or 6mm2) copper wire around the Ground post of the 600SSH.
Tighten the Ground post locking nut in the 600SSH onto the copper wire.
Securely connect the copper wire to the grounding system (Protective Earth) according to applicable
regulations.
Using diagonal cutters or long nose pliers, remove the knockouts that cover the cable openings to
the 600SSH.
Pack both of the surge suppressor Ethernet jacks with dielectric grease.
Wrap a splice loop in the loose end of the Ethernet cable from the SM.
Connect that cable to one of the Ethernet jacks.
10
Connect an Ethernet cable to the other Ethernet jack of the 600SSH and to the power adapter.
11
Replace the cover of the 600SSH.
General protection installation
To adequately protect a 450 Platform Family installation, both ground bonding and transient voltage surge
suppression are required.
Grounding cable requirements
When routing, fastening and connecting grounding cables, the following requirements must be
implemented:

Grounding conductors must be run as short, straight, and smoothly as possible, with the fewest
possible number of bends and curves.

Grounding cables must not be installed with drip loops.

All bends must have a minimum radius of 203 mm (8 in) and a minimum angle of 90° (Figure 72). A
diagonal run is preferable to a bend, even though it does not follow the contour or run parallel to the
supporting structure.

All bends, curves and connections must be routed towards the grounding electrode system, ground
rod, or ground bar.

Grounding conductors must be securely fastened.

Braided grounding conductors must not be used.

Approved bonding techniques must be used for the connection of dissimilar metals.
Page 6-13
Chapter 6: Installation
Mount the ODU, LPU and surge suppressor
Figure 72 Grounding cable minimum bend radius and angle
Caution
Do not attach grounding cables to the ODU mounting bracket bolts, as this arrangement will
not provide full protection.
Page 6-14
Chapter 6: Installation
Mount the ODU, LPU and surge suppressor
Basic requirements
The following basic protection requirements must be implemented:

ODU must be in ‘Zone B’ (see Lightning protection zones on page 3-9).

ODU must be grounded to the supporting structure.

A surge suppression unit must be installed on the outside of the building.

The distance between the ODU and Gigabit Surge Suppressor should be kept to a minimum.

The drop cable must not be laid alongside a lightning air terminal.

All grounding cables must be a minimum size of 10 mm2 csa (8AWG), preferably 16 mm2 csa
(6AWG), or 25 mm2 csa (4AWG).
Protection requirements for a wall installation
If the ODU is to be mounted on the wall of a building, then in addition to the general protection
requirements (above), the following requirements must be observed:
 The equipment must be lower than the top of the building or its lightning air terminal.
 The building must be correctly grounded.
Schematic examples of wall installations are shown in Figure 73.
Figure 73 Grounding and lightning protection on wall
Page 6-15
Chapter 6: Installation
Mount the ODU, LPU and surge suppressor
Protection requirements for a mast or tower installation
If the ODU is to be mounted on a metal tower or mast, then in addition to the general protection
requirements (above), the following requirements must be observed:

The equipment must be lower than the top of the tower or its lightning air terminal.

The metal tower or mast must be correctly grounded.
Schematic examples of mast or tower installations are shown in Figure 74.
Page 6-16
Chapter 6: Installation
Mount the ODU, LPU and surge suppressor
Figure 74 Grounding and lightning protection on mast or tower
Outdoor CAT5e cable
Cat5e cable
Ground Cable
Tower/building ground system
AP/BHM
Ground to opposite side
ODU grounding lug
Equipment building
Gigabit surge suppressor
Gigabit surge suppressor
External
ground bar
Ground ring
Page 6-17
Power
supply
Network
switch
Chapter 6: Installation
Mount the ODU, LPU and surge suppressor
Protection requirements on a multifloor building
If the ODU is to be mounted on a high rise building, it is likely that cable entry is at roof level (Figure 42)
and the equipment room is several floors below. The following additional requirements must be observed:

The ODU must be below the lightning terminals and finials.

A grounding conductor must be installed around the roof perimeter to form the main roof perimeter
lightning protection ring.

Air terminals are typically installed along the length of the main roof perimeter lightning protection ring
typically every 6.1m (20ft).

The main roof perimeter lightning protection ring must contain at least two down conductors
connected to the grounding electrode system. The down conductors should be physically separated
from one another, as far as practical.
Figure 75 Grounding and lightning protection on building
Page 6-18
Chapter 6: Installation
Installing the copper Cat5e Ethernet interface
Installing the copper Cat5e Ethernet
interface
To install the copper Cat5e Ethernet interface, use the following procedures:

Install the main drop cable on page 6-19

Install the bottom LPU to PSU drop cable on page 6-21

Installing external antennas to a connectorized ODU on page 6-23
Caution
To avoid damage to the installation, do not connect or disconnect the drop cable when
power is applied to the PSU or network terminating equipment.
Caution
Always use Cat5e cable that is gel-filled and shielded with copper-plated steel. Alternative
types of Cat5e cable are not supported by Cambium Networks. Cambium Networks supply
this cable (Cambium part numbers WB3175 and WB3176), RJ45 connectors (Cambium part
number WB3177) and a crimp tool (Cambium part number WB3211). The LPU and
grounding kit contains a 600 mm length of this cable.
Install the main drop cable
Warning
The metal screen of the drop cable is very sharp and may cause personal injury.

ALWAYS wear cut-resistant gloves (check the label to ensure they are cut resistant).

ALWAYS wear protective eyewear.

ALWAYS use a rotary blade tool to strip the cable (DO NOT use a bladed knife).
Warning
Failure to obey the following precautions may result in injury or death:

Use the proper hoisting grip for the cable being installed. If the wrong hoisting grip is used,
slippage or insufficient gripping strength will result.

Do not reuse hoisting grips. Used grips may have lost elasticity, stretched, or become
weakened. Reusing a grip can cause the cable to slip, break, or fall.

The minimum requirement is one hoisting grip for each 60 m (200 ft) of cable.
Page 6-19
Chapter 6: Installation
Installing the copper Cat5e Ethernet interface
Cut to length and fit hoisting grips
Cut the main drop cable to length from the top LPU to the bottom LPU.
Slide one or more hoisting grips onto the top end of the drop cable.
Secure the hoisting grip to the cable using a special tool, as recommended by the manufacturer.
Terminate with RJ45 connectors
Caution
Check that the crimp tool matches the RJ45 connector, otherwise the cable or connector
may be damaged.
Strip the cable outer sheath and fit the RJ45 connector load bar.
Fit the RJ45 connector housing as shown. To ensure there is effective strain relief, locate the cable
inner sheath under the connector housing tang.
Table 100 RJ45 connector and cable color code
Pin
Color (Supplied
cable)
Color
(Conventional)
Light Orange
White/Orange
Orange
Orange
Light Green
White/Green
Blue
Blue
Light Blue
White/Blue
Green
Green
Light Brown
White/Brown
Brown
Brown
Pins on plug face
Figure 76 RJ45 cable
RJ45 Connector (Bottom)
Straight-Through Cable
``
Page 6-20
Chapter 6: Installation
Installing the copper Cat5e Ethernet interface
Install the bottom LPU to PSU drop cable
Install the bottom LPU
Install the bottom LPU, ground it, and connect it to the main drop cable.
1 Select a mounting point for the bottom LPU within 600 mm (24 in) of the building entry point. Mount the
LPU vertically with cable glands facing downwards.
Pow er over Ethernet CAT5e
cable (gel-filled, shielded w ith
copper-plat ed steel)
Netw or k CA T5e cable
Groun d cables
Bott om LPU
M axim um 600 m m
(24 inches)
PSU dro p
cable
A C supply
PSU
Site gro unding sy stem
Build ing
en try
point
Netw or k
term inating
eq uip ment
LPU to grou nding sy st em
Gr ounding system
Connect the main drop cable using the EMC cable gland to the bottom LPU.
Fasten one ground cable to the bottom LPU using the M6 (small) lug. Tighten both nuts to a torque of
5 Nm (3.9 lb ft):
Locking nut
Washer
M6 lug
Washer
Nut
Toothed washer
Other end of ground cable has M10 lug to
ground
Select a building grounding point near the LPU bracket. Remove paint from the surface and apply
anti-oxidant compound. Fasten the LPU ground cable using the M10 (large) lug.
Page 6-21
Chapter 6: Installation
Installing the copper Cat5e Ethernet interface
Install the LPU to PSU drop cable
Use this procedure to terminate the bottom LPU to PSU drop cable with RJ45 connectors at both ends,
and with a cable gland at the LPU end.
Warning
The metal screen of the drop cable is very sharp and may cause personal injury. ALWAYS
wear cut-resistant gloves (check the label to ensure they are cut resistant). ALWAYS wear
protective eyewear. ALWAYS use a rotary blade tool to strip the cable, not a bladed knife.
Caution
Check that the crimp tool matches the RJ45 connector, otherwise the cable or connector
may be damaged.
Cut the drop cable to the length required from bottom LPU to PSU.
2 At the LPU end only:

Fit one cable gland and one RJ45 connector by following the procedure Terminate with RJ45
connectors on page 6-20.

Connect this cable and gland to the bottom LPU.
At the PSU end only: Do not fit a cable gland. Strip the cable outer sheath and fit the RJ45
connector load bar. Fit the RJ45 connector housing. To ensure there is effective strain relief, locate
the cable inner sheath under the connector housing tang:
Page 6-22
Chapter 6: Installation
Installing external antennas to a connectorized ODU
Installing external antennas to a connectorized
ODU
PMP 450i Series
To mount and connect an external antenna to the connectorized ODU, proceed as follows:
1 Mount the antenna(s) according to manufacturer’s instructions.
2 Connect the ODU A and B interfaces to the antenna(s) with RF cable of type LMR-400 (Cambium part
numbers 30010194001 and 30010195001) and N type connectors (Cambium part number
09010091001). Tighten the N type connectors to a torque setting of 1.7 Nm (1.3 lb ft).
3 If the ODU is mounted indoors, install lightning arrestors at the building entry point:
4 Form drip loops near the lower ends of the antenna cables. These ensure that water is not channeled
towards the connectors.
5 If the ODU is mounted outdoors, weatherproof the N type connectors (when antenna alignment is
complete) using PVC tape and self-amalgamating rubber tape.
Page 6-23
Chapter 6: Installation
Installing external antennas to a connectorized ODU
6 Weatherproof the antenna connectors in the same way (unless the antenna manufacturer specifies a
different method).
RF cable
CA T5e cable
Equipm ent building
or cabinet
RF cables to
antenna
Connect orized
ODU
Light ning arrestors
A C supply
PSU
Netw or k
eq uip ment
Gr ound ring
Page 6-24
Chapter 6: Installation
Installing external antennas to a connectorized ODU
7 Ground the antenna cables to the supporting structure within 0.3 meters (1 foot) of the ODU and
antennas using the Cambium grounding kit (part number 01010419001):
A ntenna
RF cable
PM P/PTP 450i grou nd
cable
Connect orized ODU
8 Fix the antenna cables to the supporting structure using site approved methods. Ensure that no undue
strain is placed on the ODU or antenna connectors. Ensure that the cables do not flap in the wind, as
flapping cables are prone to damage and induce unwanted vibrations in the supporting structure.
Note
A video on weatherproofing procedure can be found at:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=a-twPfCVq4A
Page 6-25
Chapter 6: Installation
Installing external antennas to a connectorized ODU
Assembling the PMP 450i AP 5 GHz sector antenna and
attaching to the radio
To assemble a PMP 450i Series AP antenna, perform the following steps.
Note
Cambium recommends to assemble the antenna, attach the AP and cabling, and to seal the
RF connections before installing the unit at the deployment site.
Inventory the parts to ensure that you have them all before you begin. The full set of parts is
shown below.
Figure 77 AP antenna parts
Page 6-26
Chapter 6: Installation
Installing external antennas to a connectorized ODU
Remove top plate from the antenna as shown in Figure 78.
Figure 78 Antenna top plate
Attach the antenna plate to the AP as shown in Figure 79.
Note
Please use the four “thin neck” M6 bolts and split washers provided with the
connectorized units rather that the ones provided in the antenna kit.
Figure 79 Attaching antenna plate to the AP
Page 6-27
Chapter 6: Installation
Installing external antennas to a connectorized ODU
Attach the plate mounted AP to the antenna and tighten the (4) serrated flange nuts using a
spanner wrench
Figure 80 Attaching the plate
Connect the port A of AP to vertical and port B of AP to horizontal polarization interfaces of the
antenna with RF cable. Tighten the N type connectors to a torque setting of 1.7 Nm (1.3 lb ft).
Figure 81 Connect the port A and B to the PMP 450i AP
Page 6-28
Chapter 6: Installation
Installing external antennas to a connectorized ODU
Assemble the upper bracket by attaching the (2) 7” hex bolts to the bracket using (2) serrated
flange nuts
Figure 82 AP antenna upper bracket assembly
Attach the upper bracket to the adjustment arms
using (2) hex bolts, (2) flat washers and (2) lock
washers. Feed the bolt through the lock washer
then flat washer, then thread the bolt into the
upper bracket’s threaded receptacle.
Page 6-29
Figure 83 AP antenna upper bracket
attached to upper adjustment arms
Chapter 6: Installation
Installing external antennas to a connectorized ODU
Attach the rear strap to the upper bracket using
(2) serrated flange nuts and (1) retaining
bracket. Do not tighten the nuts now.
Attach the entire upper bracket to the antenna
using (2) hex bolts, (2) flat washers and (2) lock
washers. Feed the bolt through the lock washer
then flat washer, then thread the bolt into the
upper bracket’s threaded receptacle.
10
Begin assembling the lower bracket by
attaching the (2) 7” hex bolts to the bracket
using (2) serrated flange nuts
11
Attach the rear strap to the bracket using (2) serrated flange nuts and (1) retaining bracket. Do
not tighten the nuts now.
Figure 84 Rear strap connected to upper AP
antenna bracket
Figure 85 Assembled upper bracket
connected to AP antenna
Figure 86 AP Antenna Lower Bracket
Assembly
Attach the entire lower bracket to the antenna using (2) hex bolts, (2) flat washers and (2) lock
washers.
Page 6-30
Chapter 6: Installation
Installing external antennas to a connectorized ODU
Figure 87 Lower bracket attached to AP
antenna
Page 6-31
Figure 88 Completed AP and antenna
assembly
Chapter 6: Installation
Installing external antennas to a connectorized ODU
PMP 450 Series
Assembling the PMP 450 AP antenna
To assemble a PMP 450 Series AP antenna, perform the following steps.
Note
Cambium recommends to assemble the antenna, attach the AP and cabling, and to seal the
RF connections before installing the unit at the deployment site.
Inventory the parts to ensure that you have them all before you begin. The full set of parts is
shown below.
Figure 89 PMP 450 AP antenna parts
Page 6-32
Chapter 6: Installation
Installing external antennas to a connectorized ODU
Begin assembling the upper bracket by attaching the (2) 7” hex bolts to the bracket using (2)
serrated flange nuts
Figure 90 AP antenna upper bracket assembly
Attach the upper bracket to the adjustment
arms using (2) hex bolts, (2) flat washers and
(2) lock washers. Feed the bolt through the
lock washer then flat washer, then thread the
bolt into the upper bracket’s threaded
receptacle.
Figure 91 AP antenna upper bracket attached
to upper adjustment arms
Page 6-33
Chapter 6: Installation
Installing external antennas to a connectorized ODU
Attach the rear strap to the upper bracket using (2) serrated flange nuts and (1) retaining bracket.
Do not tighten the nuts now.
Figure 92 Rear strap connected to upper AP antenna bracket
Attach the entire upper bracket to the antenna
using (2) hex bolts, (2) flat washers and (2)
lock washers. Feed the bolt through the lock
washer then flat washer, then thread the bolt
into the upper bracket’s threaded receptacle.
Figure 93 Assembled upper bracket
connected to AP antenna
Page 6-34
Chapter 6: Installation
Installing external antennas to a connectorized ODU
Begin assembling the lower bracket by
attaching the (2) 7” hex bolts to the bracket
using (2) serrated flange nuts
Figure 94 AP Antenna Lower Bracket
Assembly
Attach the rear strap to the bracket using (2)
serrated flange nuts and (1) retaining bracket.
Do not tighten the nuts now.
Figure 95 Lower bracket attached to AP
antenna
Attach the entire lower bracket to the antenna
using (2) hex bolts, (2) flat washers and (2)
lock washers.
Attaching the PMP 450 AP to the antenna
To attach a PMP 450 Series AP to the antenna, perform the following steps.
Page 6-35
Chapter 6: Installation
Installing external antennas to a connectorized ODU
Note
Use shielded cable for all infrastructure connections associated with APs, SMs, and CMMs.
The environment that these modules operate in often has significant unknown or varying RF
energy. Operator experience consistently indicates that the additional cost of shielded cables
is more than compensated by predictable operation and reduced costs for troubleshooting
and support.
Attach the included bracket to the rear of the
AP using the (4) M5 x 7mm bolts
Attach the AP to the antenna by sliding the bracket onto the bolts and tighten the (4) serrated
flange nuts using a 13 mm spanner wrench.
Figure 96 Attaching bracket to the rear of the
AP
Figure 97 Lower bracket attached to AP antenna
Page 6-36
Chapter 6: Installation
Installing external antennas to a connectorized ODU
Note
If using a non-standard antenna, do not cover the equilibrium membrane vent located on the
back of the unit.
Equilibrium Membrane Vent
Figure 98 Mounted PMP 450 AP and antenna assembly, viewed from back and back
Page 6-37
Chapter 6: Installation
Installing external antennas to a connectorized ODU
Attaching the PMP 450 Series AP and antenna to the mount
point
Attach the upper bracket of the antenna to the mount point by closing the rear strap around the
pole and tightening the (2) serrated flange nuts using a 13mm spanner wrench. These must be
tightened evenly on the pol to avoid jumping/stripping threads.
Figure 99 Attaching the AP antenna upper bracket to the pole
Attach the lower bracket of the antenna to the mount point by closing the rear strap around the
pole and tightening the (2) serrated flange nuts using a 13mm spanner wrench. These must be
tightened evenly on the pole to avoid jumping/stripping threads.
Figure 100 Attaching the AP antenna lower bracket to the pole
Use a local map, compass, and/or GPS device as needed to determine the direction that one or
more APs require to each cover the 90° sector.
Page 6-38
Chapter 6: Installation
Installing external antennas to a connectorized ODU
Choose the best mounting location for your particular application.
Note
Use the embedded spectrum analyzer or a commercial analyzer to evaluate the
frequencies present in various locations. OFDM APs need not be mounted next to
each other. They can be distributed throughout a given site. However, the 90° offset
must be maintained. If you want to collocate these APs with PMP 100 Series APs of
the 5.4-GHz frequency band range, plan to allow at least 25 MHz of separation
between their center channels.
Secure a ground strap to the ground lug on the back of the AP.
Secure the ground strap to the pole, tower, or other trusted ground.
The bracket of the standard antenna has provision for measured down tilt. The recommended
practice is to use one of the many radio analysis and mapping tools or on-line tools to calculate
down tilt based on antenna height above the service area.
The proper angle of tilt can be calculated as a factor of both the difference in elevation and the
distance that the link spans. Even in this case, a plumb line and a protractor can be helpful to
ensure the proper tilt. This tilt is typically minimal.
The number of degrees to offset (from vertical) the mounting hardware leg of the support tube is
equal to the angle of elevation from the lower module to the higher module (
Source Exif Data: 
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c006 80.159825, 2016/09/16-03:31:08
Modify Date                     : 2017:10:31 12:48:37Z
Create Date                     : 2017:10:31 12:48:35Z
Metadata Date                   : 2017:10:31 12:48:37Z
Creator Tool                    : PScript5.dll Version 5.2.2
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Microsoft Word - pmp-2020_000v002 PMP 450 R15.2 UG.docx
Creator                         : hmw746
Document ID                     : uuid:e991c22b-a87b-4961-92c4-eb78f71c500f
Instance ID                     : uuid:20bbf8cf-227c-489a-8682-3bf3736e4a1c
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 11.0 (Windows)
Page Count                      : 301
Author                          : hmw746


EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools
FCC ID Filing: QWP-50450M

Navigation menu